Samsung Cell Phone T959 User Guide

P O R T A B L E

M O B I L E

Q U A D - B A N D

P H O N E

User Manual

Please read this manual before operating your

phone, and keep it for future reference.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone?

For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:

www.samsung.com/us/support

T9 Text Input is licensed by Tegic Communications and is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437; U.S. Pat. 5,953,541; U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and

other patents pending.

ACCESS and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.

The Bluetooth word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered

trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.

microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.

Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.

Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube

are trademarks of Google Inc.

Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.

Open Source Software

Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General

Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open

source licenses, please visit:

http://opensource.samsung.com

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience

Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise,

intermittent sounds (like a siren or nearby conversation), and echoes, allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere.

How Does It Work?

Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system, the technology:

•

Captures, evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone, and the person you're speaking with.

Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise - so the person you're calling hears only your voice, without

disturbing background noise.

•

Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience, so you can hear clearly and don't need to speak louder to overcome

surrounding noise.

The noise suppression technology is built-in and already enabled in your new mobile phone. So it's ready to provide unsurpassed voice

clarity with every call.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability,

EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE

PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER

WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE

WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE

REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION

MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE

PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF

THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Customizing the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Section 3: Memory Card .............................................. 48

Using the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

SD card Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List ............... 51

Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Making a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Answering a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Prefix Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Using the Voice Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Wi-Fi Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

In Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Call Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Section 5: Entering Text ............................................... 68

Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Selecting the Text Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Using the Swype Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Using the Samsung QWERTY Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Using XT9 Predictive Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Section 1: Getting Started ..............................................6

Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Battery Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Extending Your Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Switching the Phone On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Locking and Unlocking the Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Creating a New Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Signing into Your Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Retrieving your Google Account Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Section 2: Understanding Your Phone .........................1 9

Features of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Back View of Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Phone Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sending an Audio Postcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Using Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Section 8: Multimedia ................................................ 106

Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Camera and Camcorder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Using the HD Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

The Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

doubletwist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Using the Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

INCEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Creating a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Transferring Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Removing Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

T-Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Section 9: Applications and Development ................ 124

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Accounts and sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Add to Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Section 6: Contacts ......................................................7 5

Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Finding a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Contact List Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Contact Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Contact Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Joining Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Sending a Namecard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Copying Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Synchronizing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Get Friends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

My Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Additional Contact Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

The Updates Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

The History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Section 7: Messages ....................................................9 2

Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Creating and Sending Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Viewing Newly Received Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Deleting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Messaging Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Text Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AirSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Alarm & Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

AllShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Audio Postcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Call logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Car Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Desk Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

doubletwist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

DriveSmart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Facebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Google Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Gogo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Google Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

HD Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

INCEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Kindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Layar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Market . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Downloading a New Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Launching an Installed Google Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Android Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Mini Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

My Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

My Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

News and Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Places . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Slacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Swype tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

T-Mobile TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

TeleNav GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

ThinkFree Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Qik Video Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Voice Dialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Wi-Fi Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Write and Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Section 10: Connections ............................................1 52

Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Enable Downloading for Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Mobile AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Section 11: Time Management ..................................1 67

Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Alarm and Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Setting a Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Section 12: Changing Your Settings ..........................1 71

Wireless and Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Drive Smart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Location and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Screen Unlock Pattern Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Android Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

USB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Accounts and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Privacy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

SD Card & Phone Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Search Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Language & Keyboard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Accessibility Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Voice Input and Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Section 13: Health and Safety Information ............... 202

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification Information . . . 206

Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

GPS & AGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for

Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 1: Getting Started

This section explains how to get started with your phone by

installing and charging the battery, installing the SIM card and

optional memory card, and setting up your voice mail.

Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and may vary

from your phone, depending on the software version on your phone,

and any changes to the phone’s Settings.

Before using your phone for the first time, you’ll need to install

and charge the battery and install the SIM card. The SIM card is

loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, available

optional services, and many other features. If desired, you can

also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone.

Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the

phone unlocked, at the Home screen.

All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may

vary, depending on the software version of your phone and any

changes to the phone’s Settings.

Understanding this User Manual

Special Text

The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your

phone. A robust index for features begins on page 231.

Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the

rest. These are intended to point out important information, share

quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.

The definitions for these methods are as follows:

Also included is important safety information that you should

know before using your phone. This information is available near

the back of the guide, beginning on page 202.

•

Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or

sub-menu.

This manual provides navigation instructions according to the

default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation

may be different.

•

Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.

Important: Points out important information about the current feature

that could affect performance.

Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual

assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the

available keys.

•

Warning: Brings to your attention important information to prevent

loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Text Conventions

To remove the battery cover:

1. Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch.

This manual provides condensed information about how to use

your phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions

are used to represent often-used steps:

2. Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly “pop” the

cover off the device (similar to a soda can).

➔

Arrows are used to represent the sequence of

selecting successive options in longer, or

repetitive, procedures.

Release Latch

Example: “From the Home screen, press

(

)

➔

Settings

➔

Wireless

and network

➔

Bluetooth settings.”

Battery Cover

The battery, SIM card and SD card are installed under the

battery cover.

Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure

the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down

the

Power off

key until the power-off image displays, then press

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To replace the battery cover:

2. Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until

the card clicks into place. Make sure that the card’s gold

contacts face into the phone and that the upper-left angled

corner of the card is positioned as shown.

ᮣ

Position the battery cover over the battery compartment

and press down until you hear a click.

SIM Card Overview

Important!: Before removing or replacing the SIM card, make sure the

phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down

the

Power off

key until the power-off image displays, then press

The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as

your telephone number, PIN, available optional services, and

many other features.

Install the SIM Card

Important!: The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by

scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or

removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small

children.

Installing and Removing the SIM card

To install the SIM card:

1. Confirm the battery is not currently installed within the

battery compartment. The battery can block the proper

installation of the SIM card into the slot.

Remove the SIM Card

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To remove the SIM card:

3. Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it

catches with the push-click insertion. For more information

on how to use the SD card see “Using the SD Card” on

page 48.

1. If installed, remove the battery from its compartment

(1 and 2). The battery can block the proper removal of the

SIM card from the slot.

2. Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket.

Important!: Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the

phone’s contacts.

Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not detect it and nor

service will be available. If this happens, turn off the phone, remove

the card, and reinstall the card in the correct orientation.

Installing the microSD Memory Card

Your phone supports an optional (external) microSD™ or

microSDHC™ memory card for storage of media such as music,

pictures, video and other files. The SD card is designed for use

with this mobile phone and other devices.

Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.

The microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up

to32GB.

Note: This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card.

1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing the microSD Memory Card

1. Remove the battery cover.

Installing Battery

2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card

should pop partially out of the slot.

3. Remove the card from the slot.

Battery

Before using your phone for the first time, install the battery and

charge it fully.

Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the

phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down

the

Power off

key until the power-off image displays, then press

Installing the Battery

Removing Battery

1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs

on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone,

making sure the connectors align.

ꢁ

ꢀ

2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).

Removing the Battery

ᮣ

Grip the battery at the top end (3) and lift it up and out of

the battery compartment (4).

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Charging the Battery

Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger.

If the battery is not installed and the wall charger is connected, the

handset power cycles continuously preventing proper operation.

Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can

cause the phone to become damaged.

Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall

charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with

your phone. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your

local Samsung dealer for further details.

Before using your phone for the first time, you must fully charge

the battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately

4 hours.

Important!: Although the battery comes partially charged. It is recommended

you fully charge the battery before using your device for the first

time.

1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.

Charging Head

2. Slide open the Charger/Accessory jack cover (1).

3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory

jack (2).

4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet.

The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates

both its charge state and percent of charge.

Incorrect

USB Cable

Correct

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important!: If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a

touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your

finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a

metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage

the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more

information, refer to “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 223.

ꢂ

Low Battery Indicator

When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time

remain, a warning tone sounds and the “Low battery” message

repeats at regular intervals on the display. In this condition, your

phone conserves its remaining battery power, by dimming the

backlight.

ꢃ

Incorrect

Correct

When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically

turns off.

Note: This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for

connecting the charger. If the charger is incorrectly connected,

damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone’s

warranty.

5. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power

plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s

connector from the phone.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more power.

Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or

Gallery image.

Extending Your Battery Life

Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS

functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of

helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:

Power Control

•

Use the Power Control shortcut bar.

Reduce your backlight on time.

Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.

Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.

Active applications, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization,

Location consent, or the LCD Brightness functionality all act to

drain your battery.

The Power Control shortcut bar was designed to quickly activate

(turn on), or deactivate (turn off) those functions or applications

that use the most battery power.

Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this

function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current

location; each query drains your battery.

1. From the Home screen,

touch and hold an empty

area until the Add to Home

screen menu displays.

•

Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging

your device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and

recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.

•

Turn off Automatic application sync.

2. Tap Widgets

➔

Power

Use the Power Control Widget to deactivate hardware functions such

as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization, or LCD brightness setting.

control. The Power Control

shortcut is added to the

current screen.

•

Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions

have been consuming your battery resources.

•

Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.

Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background

applications that are still running. These minimized applications can,

over time, cause your device to “slow down”.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

With a SIM card installed

3. Tap any of the icons on the Power Control shortcut bar to

activate/deactivate the feature.

1. Press and hold

until the phone switches on.

The phone searches for your network and after finding it,

you can make or receive calls.

Note: A green bar displayed beneath the icon means the application is active

(turned on). The green bar is removed from beneath the icon when the

feature is deactivated (turned off).

Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the

language, use the Language menu. For more information, refer to

“Language & Keyboard Settings” on page 196.

Switching the Phone On or Off

If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on

the device, the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays

and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card.

2. Press and hold

until the Phone options screen

appears.

At this point you can make an emergency call with the phone but

normal cell phone service is not available.

3. Tap Power Off

(

Without a SIM card installed

Locking and Unlocking the Phone

ᮣ

Tap Emergency call to make an emergency call.

By default, the phone screen locks when the backlight turns off.

– or –

ᮣ

Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any

of the directions shown unlock the phone.

1. Tap Skip to ignore the SIM Card installation tutorial and

configure various phone settings. Follow the on-screen

procedures.

Note: Selecting Location consent may drain battery power. For more

information, refer to “Power Control” on page 13.

2. Tap Finish to end the tutorial.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a New Google Account

™

You should create a Google Account when you first use your

device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This account

provides access to several device features such as Gmail, Google

Maps, Google Search, and the Android Market applications.

Before you are able to access Google applications, you must

enter your account information. These applications sync between

your device and your online Google account.

To create a new Google Account from your phone:

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Market).

2. Read the introduction and

tap Next Create to begin.

➔

3. Follow the on-screen

instructions to create a

Google Account.

– or –

Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use

of your phone. For more information, refer to “Setting up SIM Card

Lock” on page 187.

If this is not the first time

you are starting the phone,

tap

➔

(Gmail).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Retrieving your Google Account Password

Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.

A Google account password is required for Google applications. If

you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow

these instructions to retrieve it:

To create a new Google Account from the Web:

1. From a computer, launch a Web browser and navigate to

1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate

www.google.com

to http://google.com/accounts.

2. On the main page, click Sign-in

➔

Create an account now.

2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.

3. Follow the on-screen prompts to create your free account.

3. From the Please select your issue section, select I forgot my

4. Look for an email from Google in the email box you

provided, and respond to the email to confirm and activate

your new account.

password

4. Enter your full Gmail address and click Submit. Follow the

password recovery procedure.

Signing into Your Google Account

1. Launch an application that requires a Google account

(such as Android Market or Gmail).

Voice Mail

Setting Up Your Voice Mail

Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to

voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as

your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted, activate your

voicemail account.

2. Click Next

➔

3. Tap the Username and Password fields and enter your

information.

4. Tap Sign in. Your device communicates with the Google

Important!: Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access.

servers to confirm your information.

5. If prompted, create a new Gmail username by entering a

prefix for your @gmail.com email address.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice mail:

Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone

1. Dial your wireless phone number.

Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.

2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk

1. From the Home screen, tap

and then touch and hold

key on the phone you are using.

the key until the phone dials voice mail.

3. Enter your passcode.

You may be prompted to enter a password.

Visual Voicemail

2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a

Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a

voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want

without being limited to chronological order.

display name.

Accessing Your Voice Mail

1. From the Home screen, tap

Visual Voicemail ).

2. Read the on-screen information and tap Next

(Applications) ➔

You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding

(

on the keypad, by using the phone’s Application icon,

➔

Done to

then touching the Voice Mail application. To access Voice Mail

activate Visual Voicemail if this is the first time it was

accessed.A list of the voicemail messages displays.

using the menu:

1. From the Home screen, tap

and then touch and hold

until the phone dials voice mail.

Note: You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature.

Charges may apply. Please contact your service provider for further

details.

Note: Touching and holding

will launch Visual voicemail is it is already

active on your phone.

3. Tap an on-screen voicemail message to play it back.

2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice

mail center.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Package displays any installed packages or applications from the

Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove

them from your phone.

Task Manager

Your phone can run applications simultaneously, with some

applications running in the background.

• RAM manager, which displays the amount of current RAM

(Random Access Memory) currently being used and allow you to

Clear Memory for either Level 1 or Level 2 (both Level memory

locations).

Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and

the biggest reason for this are background applications. These

are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and

are still active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you

see which of these applications are still active in the background

but also easily lets you choose which applications are left

running and which are closed.

• Summary displays a visual graph indicating the available and used

space within the Random Access Memory (RAM), Program, and

External SD card.

• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.

Shutting Down an Currently Active Application

Note: The larger the number of applications running on your phone, the

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Task Manager

(

larger the energy drain on your battery.

2. From the Active applications tab, tap End to close selected

applications or tap End all to close all background running

applications.

Task Manger Overview

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Task Manager

(

– or –

Press and hold

then tap Task Manager. This screen

contains the following tabs:

• Active applications display those currently active applications

running on your phone.

Getting Started

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 2: Understanding Your Phone

This section outlines key features of your phone. It also describes

the phone’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the

phone is in use.

•

5 Megapixel camera and video with autofocus, multi shot

8x digital zoom

•

Brilliant widescreen Super AMOLED™ display

MP3 player with Multitasking features

Assisted GPS (TeleNav GPS Navigation)

Webkit-based browser

Features of Your Phone

Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many

significant features. The following list outlines a few of the

features included in your phone.

Downloadable applications from the Android Market

Up to 32GB expandable memory slot

•

Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard

Front Facing camera and preloaded Qik(r) application for Video Chat

Mobile Hotspot Capabiltiy

High Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+) delivering data speeds faster

than the current 3G network technology.

•

Android 2.2 Froyo Operating system

Preloaded with the movie INCEPTION

Compatible with Adobe Flash 10.1

doubleTwist(r) with AirSync(tm) to wirelessly sync your music playlists,

photos and videos with your home computer.

Wi-Fi Capability

•

T-Mobile TV™

USB Tethering-capable

Samsung Media Hub

Bluetooth enabled

E-Reader with preloaded Amazon Kindle™ Application

Full integration with Google applications (Gmail, YouTube, Google

Maps)

Slacker Radio

•

Multiple Messaging Options: Email, Audio Postcard, Instant Messaging,

Picture Messaging, Google Talk, Google Search, Video Messaging, Text

Messaging, Predictive Text

•

Supports synchronizing with a corporate email account

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following list correlates to the illustrations.

1. USB Power/Accessory connector allows you to connect a

power cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data

cable.

Front View

The following illustrations show the main elements of your

phone:

15 14 13

2. Strap holder is used to connect a carrying strap to the

phone.

Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in

standby mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice

When receiving an incoming call:

volume during a call.

•

Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone.

Pressing and holding the volume key rejects the call.

4. Menu key displays a list of options available for the current

screen. From the Home screen it displays Add, Wallpaper,

Search, Notifications, Edit, and Settings options.

5. Home key displays the Home screen when pressed.

during phone calls and allows other

Microphone is used

callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them.

It is also used to make voice note recordings.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. Quick search is used to search the device for applications,

contact information, or searches the internet for

information.

14. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the

surface of the screen. This is typically used to detect when

your face is pressed up against the screen, such as during

a phone call.

8. Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.

–

While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and

locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.

9. Display shows all the information needed to operate your

phone, such as the connection status, received signal

strength, phone battery level, and time.

15. Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust

the screen brightness/contrast.

10. Power/End key ends a call or switches the phone off and

on. Press and hold for two seconds to turn off Silent,

Mobile data connection, Airplane mode, or to turn the

phone on or off.

•

In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device

to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.

•

In dim light conditions, the device increases the screen brightness

to compensate.

Back View of Your Phone

The following illustration shows the external elements of your

phone:

11. Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while

facing the screen and allows you to video conference.

12. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free headset

so you can listen to music.

13. Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the

different ring tones or sounds offered by

your phone.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Phone Display

Your phone’s display provides information about the phone’s

status, and is the interface to the features of your phone. The

display indicates your connection status, signal strength, battery

status and time. Icons display at the top of the phone when an

incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a

specified time when an alarm was set. The screen also displays

notifications, and Application (or shortcut) bar with four icons:

Phone, Contacts, Messaging, and Applications.

Signal strength

Connection Status

Battery status

1. Camera lens is used to take photos.

Status Bar

Time

2. External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and

other sounds offered by your phone.

Google search

Notification

area

Status

area

Home Screen

Shortcuts

Primary

Shortcuts

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display settings

Indicates there is no signal available.

Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.

Displays when there is a system error or alert.

Displays when a call is in progress.

In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the

wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Settings) ➔ Display. For more information, refer to

“Display Settings” on page 183.

Status Bar

(Applications) ➔

(

The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,

signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays

notifications about incoming messages and calls and other

actions.

Displays when a call is on hold.

Displays when you have missed an incoming call.

Displays when the speakerphone is on.

This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display

screen:

Indicator Icons

This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display

and Indicator area:

Displays when Call forwardingis set toAlways forward.

Fo r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Configurin g V oic e C alls”

on page 179.

Displays your current signal strength. The greater the

number of bars, the stronger the signal.

Displays your current battery charge level. Icon

shown is fully charged.

100%

Indicates that the Flight Mode is active. You cannot

send or receive any calls or access online information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Displays your current battery charge level is

very low.

Displays when there is a new text message.

Shows your current battery only has three percent

power remaining and will immediately shutdown.

Represented as a blinking icon.

Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to

be delivered.

Displays when there is a new voicemail message.

Displays when connected to the EDGE network.

Displays when there is a new visual voicemail

message.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the EDGE network.

Displays in the notifications window when there is

a new Email message.

Displays when connected to the 3G network.

Displays when an alarm is set.

For more information, refer to “Setting an Alarm” on

page 168.

Displays when your phone is communicating with

the 3G network.

Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent mode

and Vibrate is set to Always or Only in silent mode.

Displays when connected to the HSPA+ network.

Displays when data synchronization and application

sync is active and synchronization is in progress

for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.

Displays when your phone is communicating with the

HSPA+ network.

Displays when the phone is connected to a computer

using a supported USB cable connection.

Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent

mode and Vibrate is set to Never or Only when

not in silent mode.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and

enabled.

Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active and

in use.

Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active

and communicating with an external device.

Displays when the external SD card (internal

microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from

the phone and is now ready for either removal or

formatting.

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Displays when the External SD card is being prepared

for mounting to the device. This is required for

communication with the External SD card.

Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a

communication issue with the target Wireless

Access Point (WAP).

Displays when the phone has detected an active USB

connection and is in a USB Debugging mode or the

microSD card has been improperly removed.

Displays when the Mobile AP Hotspot feature is active

and communicating. For more information, refer to

“Mobile AP” on page 165.

Displays when the USB Tethering feature is active and

communicating. For more information, refer to

“Tethering” on page 174.

For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see

“Changing Your Settings” on page 171.

Displays when the phone’s location feature is on

and available for location-based services such as

GPS Navigation.

Displays when your phone’s GPS is on and

communicating.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notification Bar

Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the Home screen by

pressing and then tapping Notifications

The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync

status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can

expand this area to provide more detailed information about the

current on-screen notification icons.

Clearing Notifications

To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:

1. Tap the status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications panel

1. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications panel (1).

2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated

2. Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel.

application (2).

Accessing Additional Panel Functions

In addition to notifications, this panel also provides quick and

ready access to five device functions. These can be quickly

activated or deactivated.

The following functions can either be activated (blue) or

deactivated (white): Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

GPS

Silent, or Auto rotation

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Edit

device. You can have up to eight extended screens.

Settings ) provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.

The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing and then

tapping Settings

(

) allows you to add or remove extended screens from your

Function Keys

Your phone comes equipped with four main function keys that

can be used on any screen: Menu Home, Back, and Search.

(

–

Menu Key

➔

The Menu key (

) activates an available menu function for the

Home Key

current screen or application. When on the Home screen, the

following menu options are available:

The Home key (

) takes you back to your Home screen (#4 of

the 7 total available screens).

•

Add

Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, and Wallpapers.

Wallpaper ) lets you to customize the current screen’s

wallpaper image by choosing from either Home screen Wallpaper, Live

Wallpaper or Wallpaper gallery).

(

) adds one of the following functions to a selected screen:

ᮣ

Press and hold to launch the Recent Apps/Task Manager

screen. For more information, refer to “Accessing

Recently-Used Applications” on page 35.

•

(

Back Key

–

You can obtain images from either your Pictures folder, from any of the

available images within the device’s Wallpaper gallery, or from the

animated Live Wallpapers.

The Back key (

) returns you to the previously active screen.

If the on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the

keyboard.

•

search for a key term both on the phone and online.

Notifications ) allows you to expand popup notifications area to

(

) displays the Google Search box that you can use to

(

provide more detailed information about the current on-screen

notification icons.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Search Key

Using Google Search

The Search key (

) displays the Google Search box that can

Use the Google Search box to manually search for a term on both

your device and on the Web.

be used to search for either a key term both on the phone and

online. In some instances, this key opens a search box specific

only to the current application.

1. Press

to launch the Google Search box.

to select a search area:

2. Tap

Voice Search

Options

• All searches your device, the Web, and the Android Market for your

search term.

(speech to text)

• Web searches for your term only on the Web using the Google

search engine.

Field

• Apps searches for your term only within the Android Market.

• Contacts searches for your term only within your current Contacts

entries.

3. Enter a search term and tap a match from the list of

suggestions, phone search results, or previously chosen

search matches. Once touched, the item opens in the

appropriate application.

1. Press

– or –

to launch the Google Search box.

Press

and tap

➔

2. Tap

to launch the Voice Search function.

– or –

Touching Voice Search

(

) lets you speak into your

device's microphone to enter a search term.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Additional Voice Search Functions

•

note to self [message] allows you to search for a note save to your

Memo Pad.

For more information, refer to:

Home Screen

http://www.google.com/mobile/voice-actions/

The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications

on your phone. There are seven available panels, each populated

with default shortcuts or applications. You can customize each of

these panels.

From an open Voice Search dialog, speak the following words to

access additional features:

•

voice actions (such as: [your query]) allows you to search the web by

speaking the search parameters.

Status Bar

listen to [artist/song/album] allows you to begin listening to the

selected song on Slacker radio.

Google search

send text to [receipient] [message] allows you to open the

Messaging screen.

bar/Widget

Notification

area

navigate to [address/city/business name] allows you to receive

directions via Google maps™. Use either an Address name, Business

name, business type, or other navigation information to get the desired

directions.

Status

area

Home Screen

•

call [name] allows you to open the phone dial and automatically

send email to [recipient] [subject] allows you to open your email

account and compose a new email message.

Shortcuts

•

map of [location] allows you to view a map of an area via Google

maps. Use either an Address name, Business name, zip code, or other

navigation information.

Primary

Shortcuts

go to [website] allows you to navigate to any component of your

device.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user

notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress),

new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, emails, and

Text/MMS messages.

Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all

screens.

•

Google search is an on-screen Internet search engine powered by

Google™. Touch to access the Voice Search feature where you can

verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search.

Widgets are self-contained on-screen applications (not shortcuts).

These can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or

extended).

–

These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the

Status bar area) and display important user information.

–

This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the

Status bar (page 26) or by accessing the Notifications panel [

Notifications

(

)].

•

Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the

device such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G and Wi-Fi

communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.

Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as

Camera, YouTube, Voicemail, Contacts, Phone, Email, Market, etc.

These function the same as shortcuts on your computer.

Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information

about notifications and device status, and allows access to application

Widgets.

–

Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,

the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.

The Application screens can be accessed by tapping Applications

–

Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen

width to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other

customization features.

(

) from the Primary shortcuts area.

–

Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number

of times.

–

There are seven available extended screens (panels) each of which

may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens

share the use of the three Primary Shortcuts.

–

The current screen is indicated at the top by a larger circle. Up to seven

(7) total screens are available.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present throughout all of the

available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device

or launch any of the following functions:

As you transition from screen to screen, the screen counter

(located at the top) displays the current panel number in a circle.

–

Phone

Call logs, Favorites, and Voicemail).

Contacts ) launches the Contacts-related screens (Contacts,

Groups, History, and Updates).

Messaging ) launches the Messaging menu (create new

(

) launches the phone-related screen functions (Dialer,

Widget

(

Counter displays

the currently

active screen

messages or open an existing message string).

Applications/Home toggles functionality between the Home and

Application screens.

•

Tap Applications

(

) to access the Application screens loaded

with every available local application.

•

While in the Applications screens, tap the Home icon (

easily return to the Home screen.

) to

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and

buttons to select or activate an item. For example: press the

Navigation key to scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys

require you to press and hold them to activate a feature, for example,

you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone.

Screen Navigation

Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate

the features of your phone and enter characters. The following

conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation

action in the procedures.

•

Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on

the virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon

to open the application. A light touch works best.

Navigating Through the Screens

The following terms describe the most common hardware and

on-screen actions.

Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available

options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: press and hold

from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.

Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This

finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when

flicking through contacts or a message list.

Press and hold

Tap

Touch and hold

Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally

across the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to

scroll through a list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the

Home screen to scroll among the seven panels.

•

Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start

to move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target

position.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Pinch: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom

out when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers inward to

zoom out.)

Swipe or slide

and Drag

Spread: “Spread” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom

in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers outward to

zoom in.)

Flick

Pinch (Zoom Out)

Spread (Zoom In)

Rotate

•

Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to

landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to

landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard,

or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.

Note: These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order. For more

information, refer to “Customizing the Screens” on page 43.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Sub-Menus

Menu Navigation

You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs

using both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and

features are accessed by scrolling through the available

on-screen menus. Your phone defaults with seven home screens.

Sub-menus are available from within most screen and

applications.

1. Press

phone screen.

2. Tap an option.

. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the

Navigating Through the Application Menus

There are four default Application Menus available. As you add

more applications from the Android Marketplace, more screens

are created to house these new apps.

1. Press

Application Menu displays.

To close the Applications screen, tap

2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.

and then tap

(Applications). The first

•

or press

3. Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the associated

application.

Sub-Menu items

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Context Menus

Accessing Recently-Used Applications

1. Press and hold the

to open the recently-used

Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that

apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to

menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on

your desktop computer.

applications window.

Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task

Manager

ᮣ

Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context

menu.

2. A pop-up displays the six most recently used applications.

3. Tap an icon to open the recent application.

Applications

The Application menu provides quick access to the most

frequently used applications. Applications display on each of the

three panels on the Applications screens.

Context

The following table contains a description of each application

available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the

Applications screens. If the application is already described in

another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to

that particular section is provided. For information on navigating

through the Applications icons, see “Navigating Through the

Application Menus” on page 34.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Alarm & Clocks

Accounts and sync

Allows you to set an alarm, configure and view the

World clock, use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The

applications display in a tabular format and quickly

accessed with the touch of a finger.

Allows you to add applications and determine which

type of account information you want to synchronize

with your Contact list. For more information, refer to

“Accounts and Synchronization” on page 192.

For more information refer to Alarms & Clocks on

page 168, World clock on page 169, Stopwatch on

page 169, or Setting a Timer on page 170 of this user

guide.

Add to Home

Allows you to add Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or

Wallpapers to the current screen.

For more information about Add to Home, see “To add a

AllShare

shortcut via the Add to Home screen:” on page 45.

Allows you to share your on-device media content

with other external devices using DLNA (Digital Living

Network Alliance) and built-in AllShare™ technology.

Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.

AirSync

This application helps to wirelessly sync your iTunes

playlists, music, photos and videos between your

computer and your Android Phone over your home Wi-Fi

network. For more information, refer to “AirSync” on

page 125.

For more information, refer to “AllShare” on page 125.

Amazon MP3

Launches the Amazon MP3 music download service

where you can download DRM-Free (digital rights

management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.

For more information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on

page 115.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Audio Postcard

Camera

Allows you to select a frame, take a picture and then

record a voice message up to one minute long and send

it as an Audio Postcard. For more information, refer to

“Sending an Audio Postcard” on page 98.

Launches the built-in 5.0 megapixel camera application

from where you can take a picture with either the front or

rear facing cameras.

Note: An SD card must be inserted before the camera will take

Calculator

and store photos.

Launches the on-screen calculator application. The

calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions;

addition,subtraction,multiplication,anddivision.Youcan

also use this as a scientific calculator.

For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on

page 106.

Car Home

For more information, refer to “Calculator” on page 127.

Configures the phone’s user interface to be easier to use

while you are driving. For more information, refer to “Car

Home” on page 129.

Calendar

Launches a calendar application that syncs to your

Facebook™, Google™, or Microsoft Exchange work

calendars.

Contacts

Thedefaultstoragelocationforsavingphone numbersto

your Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.

For more information, refer to “Calendar” on page 167.

Fo r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Contact s L ist” o n p age 76.

Call Logs

Desk Home

Provides a list detailing all the calls that have been

missed,received ,o r d ialed .F o r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o

“Call Logs Tab” on page 63.

Configuresthephone’suserinterfacetomimicadesktop

layout. For more information, refer to “Desk Home” on

page 129.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

doubletwist

Files

doubleTwist Player is the best all-in-one music, radio

and video app. For more information, refer to

“doubletwist” on page 130.

Lets you view supported imagefiles and text fileson your

microSDcard.Organizeandstoredata,images,andmore

in your own personal file folders. Files are stored to the

memory card in separate (user defined) folders.

DriveSmart

DRIVE

SMART

For more information, refer to “Files” on page 115.

Launches the DriveSmart application that can be used to

reduce distractions from your phone by silencing

notifications, routing calls to voicemail and customizing

auto responses to both callers and text message

respondents notifying them that your driving.

Gallery

Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in

the microSD card. For more information, refer to “The

Gallery” on page 116.

Fo r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “DriveSmart” o n p age 130.

Gmail

Provides access to your Gmail account. Google Mail

(Gmail)isaweb-basedemailservice.Gmailisconfigured

when you first set up your phone. For more information,

refer to “Using Google Mail” on page 104.

Provides access to both your Outlook (Exchange Server-

based) work email and Internet email accounts (such as

Gmail and Yahoo! Mail). For more information, refer to

“Email” on page 98.

Gogo

Facebook

Gogo, powered by Aircell, turns a commercial airplane

into a Wi-Fi hotspot with true inflight Internet access.

Passengers with Wi-Fi enabled devices, such as

smartphones can surf the Web, check e-mail, instant

message, access a corporate VPN and more.

Launches the Facebook application. For more

information, refer to “Facebook” on page 130.

For more information, refer to “Gogo” on page 131.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Google Search

Latitude

Providesanon-screenInternetsearchenginepoweredby

Google™. For more information, refer to “Using Google

Search” on page 28.

Lets you see your friends’ locations and share yours

with them. The application also lets you see your

friends’ locations on a map or in a list. It also lets you

send instant messages and emails, make phone calls,

and get directions to your friends’ locations.

HD Camcorder

In addition to taking photos, the built-in camera also

doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record,

view, and send high definition videos. For more

information, refer to “Using the HD Camcorder” on

page 114.

For more information, refer to “Latitude” on page 133.

Layar

Works by using a combination of the mobile

phone’s camera, compass and GPS data to identify

the user’s location and field of view, retrieve data

based on those geographical coordinates, and

overlay that data over the camera view.

Inception

This movie is preloaded on the microSD card included

with this phone. Just insert the microSD card, tap the

Home screen icon and enjoy. For more information, refer

to “INCEPTION” on page 117.

For more information, refer to “Layar” on page 133.

Maps

Kindle

Launches a Web-based dynamic map that helps you find

local businesses, locate friends, view maps and get

driving directions. For mor e i nformation, refer to “Maps”

on page 134.

Opens the Amazon Kindle™ store that provides access

to thousands of online digital books and publications.

These documents can be downloaded directly to

your device. For more information, refer to “Kindle” on

page 132.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Market

Mini Diary

Allows you to find and download free and for-purchase

applications on Android Market. For more information,

refer to “Downloading a New Google Application” on

page 136.

Allows you to create a mini diary where you can add a

photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable

life event.

For more information, refer to “Mini Diary” on page 139.

Media Hub

Music Player

Provides one-stop access to the hottest movies and TV

programs that you can rent or buy and watch anytime,

anywhere .F o r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Medi a H ub” on

page 118.

Launches the built-in Music Player that allows you

to play music files that you have stored on your

microSD card. You can also create playlists. For more

information, refer to “Music Player” on page 120.

Memo

My Account

Creates new text memos. For more information, refer to

“Memo” on page 138.

Provides you with account specific information such as:

current status, Ativity, Set Alerts, Bill Summary, Plan

Services, and FAQ’s Info. For more information, refer to

“My Account” on page 140.

Messaging

Provides access to text and multimedia messaging (SMS

and MMS). For more information, refer to “Creating and

Sending Messages” on page 92.

My Device

Allows youtoconfiguredevice settings,viewPersonalize

your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or Wallpapers, View Quick

Tools,Support,andbatterystorageinformation .F o r m ore

information, refer to “My Device” on page 141.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Navigation

Slacker

Launches a Web-based navigation application.

Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile phones.

For more information, refer to “Slacker” on page 145.

Swype Tips

Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be

wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.

Provides an on-screen video tutorial that teaches you

how to use Swype text input method. For more

information ,r efe r t o “Swyp e T ex t E ntr y T ips” o n p age 70.

Fo r m or e i nformation, refe r t o “Navigation” o n p age 142.

News & Weather

Launches a Web-based news and weather feed based

on your current location. For more information, refer to

“News and Weather” on page 144.

T-Mobile TV

Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your phone. This

application is a subscription service. For more

information, refer to “T-Mobile TV” on page 145.

Places

Displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps.

When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business

or person, find out more information about the business,

see coupons, public responses, and more. For more

information, refer to “Places” on page 144.

Talk

Launches a Web-based Google Talk application that

lets you chat with family and friends over the Internet for

free. For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on

page 105.

Settings

Accesses the device’s built-in Settings menu. For more

information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on

page 171.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Task Manager

Video Player

Use Task Manager to see which applications are running

on your phone, and to end running applications to extend

battery life.

Launches your device’s built-in video application

that plays video files stored on your microSD card.

Fo r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Usin g t h e V ide o P layer” on

page 117.

For more information, refer to “Task Manager” on

page 146.

Visual Voicemail

TeleNav GPS

VisualVoicemailenablesuserstoviewalistofpeoplewho

left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message

they want without being limited to chronological order.

This driving aid provides both audible and visual

navigation instructions for GPS navigation. For more

information, refer to “TeleNav GPS” on page 146.

For more information, refer to “Visual Voicemail” on

page 17.

ThinkFree Office

Voice Dialer

ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office

compatible office suite. This application provides a

central place for managing your documents online or

offline.

Launches your device’s built-in voice recognition

software, called Voice Dialer, to dial a phone number in

your Contacts or to launch phone functions. For more

information, refe r t o “Usin g t h e V oic e D ialer” o n p age 54.

For more information, refer to “ThinkFree Office” on

page 147.

Voice Recorder

Video Chat

Allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long

and then immediately send it as a message. For more

information, refer to “Voice Recorder” on page 149.

Allows you to record and share live videos on your device

with your friends, family, and your favorite social

networks.F o r m or e i nformation ,r efe r t o “Qi k V ide o C hat”

on page 147.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Voice Search

YouTube

Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition

software and initiates a Google search based on the

recognized text. For more information, refer to “Voice

Search” on page 150.

Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser.

For more information, refer to “YouTube” on page 123.

Customizing the Screens

Web

You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the

Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one

screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms

of media, while another screen might contain communication

apps such as Gmail and IM.

Openthebrowsertostartsurfingtheweb.Thebrowseris

fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to

enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone.

For more information, refer to “Web” on page 152.

You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:

Wi-Fi Calling

•

Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens

Adding and Removing Shortcuts

Adding and Removing Widgets

Creating Folders

Provides the ability to use your available Wi-Fi data

connection to make outbound calls that do not

count against your phone minutes. Similar to VOIP

(Voice Over IP). For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi

Calling” on page 57.

Changing the Background (Wallpapers)

Adding and Deleting Screens

Write and Go

Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these

screens and then add them back later.

Use write and go to jot down an idea, then decide what

format you want to use: Text message (SMS)/Multimedia

message (MMS), email, calendar, or memo.

Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.

For more information, refer to “Write and Go” on

page 151.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Rearranging the Screens

Important!: Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least

one screen.

1. Press

➔

and then tap Edit

(

2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new

location. Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right

is screen position #7.

To delete a screen:

1. Press

then tap Edit

2. Touch and drag the

➔

and

(

Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts

The device comes with four Primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts,

Messaging, and Applications/Home. As long as the menu is

displayed in a Customizable grid, you can replace the Phone,

Contacts, and Messaging shortcuts with other applications so

you access the shortcuts that are most frequently used.

undesired screen down

to the Remove tab

(

3. Press

to return to

1. Press

2. Press

3. Press

and then tap Applications

and then tap View type

(

the main Home screen.

To add a screen:

1. Press

then tap Edit

➔

Customizable grid.

➔

and

and then tap Edit. A box outline then appears

(

around the application icons.

2. Tap the Add icon (

). The newly added screen appears

4. Scroll through the list and locate the desired application.

as the last page.

5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it over one of

3. Press

to return to the main Home screen.

the four primary shortcuts to replace it.

•

The new primary shortcut displays at the bottom of the screen. and

the previous primary shortcuts switches places with your selected

icon.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Press

and then tap Save

3. Tap Applications

(

) to reveal all your current available

applications. By default, applications are displayed as an

Alphabetical grid.

7. Tap

to return to the Home screen.

Managing Shortcuts

4. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired

Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must carefully

touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the

screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can begin to move it to the

adjacent screen.

application.

5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut then

If this does not work, delete it from its current screen. Activate the new

screen and then add the selected shortcut.

appears to hover over the current screen.

6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the

current screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock

the shortcut into its new position.

To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:

1. Press

to go to the

Home screen.

To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:

2. Select a location (screen)

for your new shortcut by

scrolling across your

available screens until

you reach the desired

one.

1. Press

to go to the

Home screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty

area of the screen.

3. From the Add to Home

screen window tap

Shortcuts

4. Tap a selection from the

available list.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To delete a shortcut:

To remove a Widget:

1. Touch and hold a

Widget until it unlocks

from the current

screen.

1. Press

to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from

its location on the current screen.

3. Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab (

) and release

2. Drag the widget over

it.

the Remove tab (

)

Adding and Removing Widgets

and release it.

Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on

any screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.

•

As you place the Widget

into the Trash, both items

turn red.

To add a Widget:

1. Press

to go to the Home screen.

•

This action doesn’t delete

the Widget, it just

removes it from the

current screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Widgets

To place a widget onto a different screen:

4. Tap an available Widget to place it on your current screen.

1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.

2. Drag it to the edge of your screen.

3. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until it turns light

blue.

4. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.

5. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.

Understanding Your Phone

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating and Managing a Folder

2. Drag the folder over the Remove tab (

) and release it.

Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together

on the workspace.

Managing Wallpapers

Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live

wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default

phone wallpapers).

To create a new on-screen folder:

1. Press

to go to the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery

power.

3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Folders

4. Tap an available folder type and place it on the current

To change the current wallpaper:

screen.

1. Press

to go to the Home screen.

Renaming a folder

2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.

3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Wallpapers

4. Select a Wallpaper:

1. Tap the desired folder you want to rename.

2. With the folder open, touch and hold the Folder title bar

(top of the Folder window) until the Rename folder pop-up

displays.

•

Tap Home screen Wallpaper to select from a user image stored in

the camera image gallery, crop the image, and tap Save

Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds,

once done tap Set wallpaper

3. Tap the folder name field, enter a new title for this folder

and tap OK

Tap Wallpaper gallery, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper

image, then tap Set wallpaper

Deleting a folder

1. Touch and hold a desired folder. This unlocks it from its

location on the current screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 3: Memory Card

Your device lets you use a microSD™ (SD) or microSDHC™ card

(also referred to as a memory card) to expand available memory

space. This secure digital card enables you to exchange images,

music, and data between SD-compatible devices. This section

addresses the features and options of your device’s SD

functionality. The device has a USB SD card mode.

SD card Overview

After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your

computer to access and manage the SD card.

Important!: If access to the external SD card is not available, download and

install the USB drivers.

•

microSD card storage: up to 2GB in size

SDHC card storage: up to 32GB in size

microSD Icon Indicators

The following icons show your microSD card connection status at

a glance:

Using the SD Card

There are several methods for using the SD card:

1. Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music, videos,

or other types of files and media).

• the card has been unmounted (released from

use) from the device.

2. To activate the camera, video, music player, and other

• the card is being prepared for use and for

mounting.

dependant media or applications.

Important!: The Camera, Audio Postcard, Music Player, and Video

functionality is all dependant on a mounted SD card. Your device

can support SDHC cards up to 32GB capacity.

• the card has been improperly removed.

Memory Card

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Touch Connect USB storage ➔ OK. Both the phone and

computer display icons to show that the device is

mounted. As soon as the connection is established a drive

letter is assigned to the phone’s storage device.

Important!: DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or

transferring files. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data.

Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD

card. Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs

out while you are using the microSD card.

6. Later, tap Turn Off to close the USB connection between the

Mounting the SD Card

phone and your computer.

To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must

mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card

establishes a USB connection with your computer.

Unmounting the SD card

Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the

SD card while removing it from the slot.

Important!: You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ SD

To mount the SD card:

card and phone storage.

1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot (For more

information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card”

on page 9.)

2. Tap Unmount SD card ➔ OK.

3. When the “SD card will be unmounted” message displays

and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list, open

the phone and remove the SD card. For more information,

refer to “Installing the microSD Memory Card” on page 9.

2. Press and hold

to turn on the phone.

3. Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable

to the computer.

4. Tap Mass Storage. The “USB connected” screen is

displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SD card Memory Status

Factory Data Reset

To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:

From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to

the factory default settings.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

Privacy

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

SD card and phone storage. The available memory

displays under the Total space and Available space

headings.

2. Tap Factory data reset. This action erases all data from

your phone except current system software and bundled

applications, or SD card files such as music or photos.

Erasing Files from the SD card

You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.

1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,

refer to “Unmounting the SD card” on page 49.

3. Tap Reset phone

2. Press

SD card and phone storage ➔ Unmount SD card

3. Tap Format SD card Format SD card Erase everything

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

OK.

➔

to format the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all

the data stored on it.

Memory Card

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List

This section describes features and functionality associated with

making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to

store contact information.

Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings menu, the

phone automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not

answer the call or is already on the phone, provided your call is not

sent to voice mail.

Displaying Your Phone Number

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ About

Ending a Call

phone

➔

Status. Your phone number displays in the Phone

ᮣ

Briefly tap

key to end the call.

number field.

Note: To redial a recent number, tap

list, and tap Call

, tap a number from the Call logs

Note: The phone’s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing

and

then tapping

➔

(Settings).

If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen,

You are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the

green bar within the Status bar.

Making a Call

You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM

card or to the phone’s memory. These entries are referred to as

the Contacts list.

In Call Notification

1. Press

2. Enter the phone number to dial then press

If you make a mistake while dialing, touch

and then tap

Call

ᮣ

to clear

the last digit. Touch and hold

sequence.

to clear the entire

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Add 2 sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a

Dialing Options

When you enter numbers on the

Keypad, you will see three on-

screen options.

2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing

after 2 seconds without any additional keys being pressed).

Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the phone

waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive numbers be

From the keypad screen, use

one of the following options:

manually sent by touching Yes

Answering a Call

When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the

incoming call image.

•

Call

number.

Delete

(

Call ) to call the entered

(

) to delete digits

The caller's phone number, picture, or name if stored in Contacts

List, displays.

from the current number.

Voice Dialer ) to launch

the voice recognition application.

To view additional dialing

options, tap

(

ᮣ

At the incoming call screen:

•

Touch and slide

to the right to answer the call.

to the left to reject the call.

•

Add to Contacts to add the

Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and

touch a predefined rejection message.

current number to either a new or existing Contacts entry.

Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you can

assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.

Send message to send the current caller a text message while still

maintaining the current call active.

Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.

If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the

entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone

number, if available.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To add a prefix:

1. Tap Prefix dialling list

add a prefix.

➔

Create. The list is empty until you

2. Enter a prefix number using the keypad and tap Save. The

Touch and drag

upward to reject

with a message

prefix displays in the Prefix dialing list.

Touch and slide

right to answer

the call

3. Tap the white circle icon beside the prefix. A green icon

indicates the selection of a prefix.

Touch and slide

left to reject

the call

4. Each time you dial a number, the activated prefix is

automatically added to the dialed number.

5. Touch another prefix in the Prefix dialing list to change

Prefix Dialing

prefixes.

When activated, this feature automatically prepends a string of

numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number. This

feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an area

code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one

prefix.

To delete a prefix:

1. From the Home screen, press

Call settings All calls Prefix dialing

list

2. Press

and then tap

➔

Prefix dialling

1. From the Home screen, press

and then tap

Prefix dialing.

and then tap Delete

(

Settings) ➔ Call settings All calls

➔

3. Tap selected prefixes to remove from them from the list.

2. Tap the Enable prefix dialling field. A check mark indicates

– or –

the Prefix dialling feature is active.

Tap Select all

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap Delete

International Calls

1. From the Home screen, tap

, then touch and hold

Using the Voice Dialer

Voice dialer is a voice recognition software used to activate a wide

variety of functions on your phone.

. The + symbol displays.

ꢄ

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area

1. From the Home screen, tap

Voice Dialer).

(Applications) ➔

code, and phone number.

(

•

If you make a mistake, tap

once to delete a single digit.

Touch and hold to delete all digits.

2. When the Voice Dialer displays the “Listening” prompt, say

3. Tap

one of the following commands:

Call

•

“Call John Doe”

Pause Dialing

“Call John Doe at home,...”

“Call vicennial”

You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with

automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone

numbers.

“Dial (866) 555 0123”

“Dial 911, 811,...”

“Dial +44 7333 444 555”

“Redial”

•

2-Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after

a two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a

comma (

,).

•

Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping

. This is

Send

“Open Calendar”

indicated in the number string as a semicolon (

;).

3. A menu prompts you to confirm your selection.

1. From the Home screen, tap

and use the on-screen

If you said a name with more than one match in Contacts,

or if you stored more than one number for the contact, you

are prompted to select from multiple options.

keypad to enter the phone number.

2. Press

and then tap Add 2 sec pause. This feature

adds an automatic two-second pause.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Call

3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be

3. Tap

dialed automatically after the second pause.

4. Once prompted, tap

to dial the remaining digits.

Send

Redialing the Last Number

Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by entering multiple

2-sec pauses.

The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,

received, or missed if the caller is identified.

4. Tap

Call

To recall any of these numbers:

Wait Dialing

1. From the Home screen, tap

Inserting a Wait into your dialing

sequence means that the phone

waits until it hears a dial tone

before proceeding with the next

sequence of numbers.

2. Tap the Call logs tab to display the list of recent calls.

Call

3. Tap the name/number and tap

– or –

Tap

to the right of the name/number.

1. From the Home screen,

Speed Dialing

tap

and use the

Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List,

you can set up to 8 speed dial entries and then dial them easily

whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric

key.

on-screen keypad to

enter the phone number.

2. Press

and then tap

Add wait. This feature

causes the phone to

require your acceptance

before sending the next set of entered digits.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Up Speed Dial Entries

Changing a Speed Dial Entry

1. From the Home screen, tap

Important!: Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other

number can be assigned to this slot.

2. Press

and then tap Speed dial setting.

1. From the Home screen,

Important!: The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number

cannot be assigned to this slot.

tap

2. Press

and then tap

3. Press

and then tap Change order.

Speed dial setting. The

Speed dial screen

displays a virtual keypad

with the numbers 1

through 9.

4. In a single motion, touch and drag an entry over another

location on the virtual keypad.

5. Tap Save to store the new assignment.

6. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Removing a Speed Dial Entry

1. From the Home screen, tap

3. Tap an unassigned

number. The Contacts

screen displays.

2. Press

and then tap Speed dial setting.

4. Tap a contact and select

3. Touch and hold an on-screen speed dial location and

select Remove from the context menu.

– or –

a number to assign to the speed dial location. The selected

contact number/image is displayed in the speed dial

number box.

Press

and then tap Remove. Tap an entry and select

Remove

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Important!: Wi-Fi must first be active and communicating prior to launching

Wi-Fi Calling.

Making a Call Using Speed Dial

You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the

Contacts List for speed dialing.

Activating Wi-Fi:

1. Press

network

➔

and then tap

➔

Wireless and

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Wi-Fi settings.

2. Touch and hold a speed dial location (numbers 2-9, or 1 if

2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. A checkmark displays to indicate

you are dialing voice mail) until the number begins to dial.

activation.

3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap

3. Tap an available WAP (Wireless Access Point) from within

the Wi-Fi networks area of the page. Follow the on-screen

instructions to complete connection.

➔

Speed dial setting and touch a speed dial

number to view the assigned phone number.

Wi-Fi Calling

Note: To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi-Fi calling

when outside the United States, the Data Roaming feature on your

device must be turned off.

Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for T-Mobile customers with a Wi-Fi

capable phone. Wi-Fi Calling is an excellent solution for coverage

issues in and around the home or wherever cellular coverage is

limited. Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network

count against available rate plan minutes.

Launching Wi-Fi Calling

Note: Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point.

The benefits of Wi-Fi Calling include the following:

•

Wi-Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current

in-home coverage experience

1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the

status bar. The network names and security settings (Open

network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks

display in the Wi-Fi networks section.

•

Wi-Fi Calling works anywhere there is an open Wi-Fi signal available

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Tap the slider to

activate Wi-Fi

Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.

Calling. The

Wi-Fi Connected

slider shows On

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Your device

connects to the

T-Mobile

Wi-Fi Communication Issue

Wi-Fi Calling

activation

slider

Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a

communication issue with the target Wireless

Access Point (WAP).

Network.

2. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Wi-Fi Calling).

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In Call Options

When Action

Then

Your phone provides a number of features that are available for

use during a call.

Displays on the You are connected to the

screen status

bar.

T-Mobile network and can

make Wi-Fi calls.

Does not display You are charged normal calling

on the screen

status bar.

rate minutes. For more

information,referto “Activating

Wi-Fi” on page 171.

Place a call

Dials the

on hold

4. If prompted, tap Confirm to register the service on the

network (for first time users).

number

Adds a

Ends the

new call

5. Use the phone Dialer, call log, or contacts list to make a

call. For more information, refer to “Making a Call” on

page 51.

call

Mutes or

Unmutes

call

Activates

speakerphone

Activates the

6. Confirm you established a Wi-Fi calling connection to the

Bluetooth headset

T-Mobile network by making sure

of the screen.

appears at the top

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjusting the Call Volume

To make a new call while a call is in progress:

1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it

up in Call history.

During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone,

to adjust the earpiece volume.

ᮣ

Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and

the Down volume key to decrease the level.

– or –

2. Tap Add call to dial the second call.

3. Dial the new phone number and tap

Call

To switch between the two calls:

From the screen during a call, press the Up Volume key.

ᮣ

Tap Swap.

From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using

these keys.

The In call number turns gray and displays On hold. The

active call displays a green background behind the

number.

Placing a Call on Hold

You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your

network supports this service, you can also make another call

while a call is in progress.

Turning the Speakerphone on and off

While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following

these steps:

To place a call on hold:

Speaker

1. Tap

(Speaker off) to turn the speakerphone on.

1. Tap Hold to place the current call on hold.

Speaker

2. Tap

(Speaker on) to turn the speakerphone off.

2. Tap Resume to activate the call that is on hold.

Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is teal. When the

speaker is turned Off, the color of the speaker is gray.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Memo During a Call

Muting a Call

1. Tap

speaking.

Mute

(Mute off) so the other caller cannot hear you

During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note).

1. Press

and then tap Memo.

Mute

2. Tap

(Mute on) so to turn mute off and resume your

2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save

conversation.

Automatic screen lock

Switching to Bluetooth Headset

1. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of

If you configured your phone with the Automatic screen lock

option, during a call your screen locks to prevent accidental

screen presses. To temporarily unlock the screen press the lock

key (on the right side of the phone).

speaker by tapping Headset

2. At the prompt, tap Yes to enable Bluetooth if it is not

Multi-Party calls

Making a Multi-Party Call

already activated.

More In-call Options

A multi-party call is a network service that allows up to six

people to participate in a multi-party or conference call.

During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the

Contacts list, or create a Memo.

For further details about subscribing to this service, contact

T-Mobile customer service.

Viewing the Contacts List

During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.

Setting up a Multi-Party Call

1. Press

2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.

3. Press to return to the active call.

and then tap Contacts.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap

Call

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Tap Add call, enter the second phone number and

tap . The first caller is placed on hold.

1. Press

and then tap Manage Conference Call

Call

2. Tap

adjacent to the participants you would like to

4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and

tap Join. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party

call and display in the order in which they were called.

split from the current call. The list displays the callers in

the order they were dialed.

Important!: A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi-party

line. Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session

and held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call. You can

swap or place each multi-party call on hold.

Having a Private Conversation With One Participant

When you have two participants

in a multi-party session, you

might be necessary to place

one of those participants on

hold so that a private

conversation can be held with a

single caller. While you are in a

multi-party call:

3. Tap the number for the participant in which you want to

speak privately.

You can now talk privately to that person while the other

participants can continue to converse with each other. If

there is only one other participant, that person is placed on

hold.

4. To return to the multi-party call, tap the Join icon. All of the

multi-party call participants can now hear each other.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dropping One Participant

2. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the

new caller on hold and activates the previous call. The

active call displays with a green background.

1. Press

and then tap Manage Conference Call.

2. Tap End to the right of the number to drop.

3. Tap Swap again to switch back.

The participant is disconnected and you can continue the

call with the other participant.

Call Logs Tab

3. Tap

to end the current call.

The Call logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts

entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Call logs

tab make redialing a number fast and easy. It is continually

updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to the

beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from the

bottom of the list.

Call Waiting

You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in

progress, if this service is supported by the network and you

must have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate.

You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. For

more information, refer to “Configuring Voice Calls” on

page 179.

The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays

phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:

To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:

Displays when a call is in progress.

Displays when a call was missed.

1. In a single motion, touch

and slide it to the right to

answer the new incoming call.

Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller is

placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessing the Call Logs Tab

Accessing Call Logs from The Notifications Area

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Call logs tab.

1. Locate

from the Notifications area of the Status bar.

2. Tap an entry to view available options.

2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then

drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the

Notifications panel (1).

Note: The Call logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is turned

on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be included in

your calling history.

3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen (2).

Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and

Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).

Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.

Indicates any received calls that were answered.

Indicates a missed call.

Tip: Press

and tap Notifications to open the panel.

This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also

choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on

how they are touched.

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Call Logs - Caller Overview

•

Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the call options screen:

• Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number.

Call options (tap)

• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the

selected entry.

• Send email allows you to create a new email that is then

addressed to the entry’s available email address.

Call Log screen

• Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration.

• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your

Contacts.

•

Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context menu:

• Call [Number] to redial the current phone number.

• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the

selected entry.

• Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone

number prior to redial.

• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your

Contacts.

• View contact to view the information for the currently stored

Contacts entry.

• Send contact information to send the Log entry information via

text message.

Entry-specific

context menu

(touch and hold)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an automatic

rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be

blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.

Erasing the Call Log

You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current

entries from the Call logs list.

• Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list.

To clear a single entry from the list:

Altering Numbers from the Call Log

1. Tap

➔

Call logs tab.

If you need to make a call from the Call logs screen and you need

to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the appropriate

prefix by prepending the number.

2. Touch and hold an entry and select Delete

To clear all entries from the list:

1. Tap

➔

Call logs tab.

1. Tap

➔

Call logs tab.

Delete.

Delete OK.

2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific

2. Press

➔

context menu.

3. Tap Select all

➔

3. Tap Edit number before call

4. Edit the number using the on-screen dialpad or delete

digits by pressing to erase the numbers.

5. Tap once the number has been changed.

Call

Call Functions and Contacts List

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen

When you are unable to answer

a call for any reason and your

screen is locked, the number of

missed calls are displayed on

the Lock screen immediately

after a call is missed.

To view a missed call

immediately:

1. Press

the screen.

to reactive

2. Touch and drag the

puzzle piece (with the

number of missed calls

on it) to the area where the piece is missing.

The Call logs tab is then displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 5: Entering Text

Thissectiondescribeshowtoselectthedesiredtextinputmethod

Selecting the Text Input Method

when entering characters into your phone. This section also

describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the

amount of key strokes associated with entering text.

The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two

locations:

Settings Menu:

Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that can

tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways

(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Locale

and text

➔

Select input method

Text Input field:

Your phone also provides several on-screen keypad text entry

options to make the task of text entry that much easier.

1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and hold

the text input field to open the context-menu.

Text Input Methods

2. Select the desired input method (Swype or Samung

There are two text input methods available:

keypad).

•

Samsung Keypad: an on-screen QWERTY keypad that can be

used in both portrait and landscape orientation.

Swype (default): a new way to enter text on touch screens.

Instead of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each

letter of a word.

Default Text

Input Method

The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait

and landscape mode.

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SWYPE Settings

Using the Swype Keyboard

Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter

a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting

your finger between words. SWYPE uses error correcting

algorithms and a language model to predict the next word.

SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system.

To configure Swype settings:

1. Press

Swype

➔

and then tap

➔

Locale and text

➔

2. Touch one of the following Swype parameters to change a

setting:

Enabling and Configuring SWYPE

3. Locate the Preferences section to alter these settings:

If you configure another text input method (Samsung keypad) you

must re-enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard.

• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.

Default language is US English.

When SWYPE is enabled there is no normal keyboard

functionality.

• Word prediction: predicts words as you are typing.

• Audio feedback: turns on sounds generated by the Swype

1. Press

and text

2. Tap Select input method

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Locale

application.

• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter

text using the keypad.

➔

Swype.

• Enable tip indicator: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.

4. Locate the Swype Advanced Settings section to alter these

settings:

• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.

When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the

next word.

• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a

sentence.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Show complete trace: sets the length of time the word trace line

remains on-screen as you swipe across the screen. Move the slider

between Shorter or Longer and touch OK.

•

Double-touch on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled

word, then touch the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold

the delete key to erase an entire word.

• Word choice window: sets the amount of times the word choice

selection window displays on screen. Move the slider between

Using the Samsung QWERTY Keypad

This QWERTY keypad can be used to enter text in either a Portrait

or landscape orientation. The only difference between the two

orientations are the sizes of the keys.

Never or Always and touch OK

• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to on-

screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or

Error Tolerant (accuracy) and touch OK

From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone

counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen

QWERTY keypad displays.

5. Locate the Help section to alter these settings:

• Swype help: allows you to view the on-line user manual for Swype.

• Tutorial: a short tutorial that helps you to get started using Swype.

6. Locate the About section to review the Swype application

information:

• Version: lists the Swype version number.

Swype Text Entry Tips

You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or

tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype

text entry tips.

•

Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as

pp in apple).

Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a

selection.

Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions.

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Samsung Keypad

2. The keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung keypad

configuration for all subsequent text input.

This device has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or

keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/

keyboard, you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other

characters.

Changing the QWERTY Input Type

There are two main keypad layout keys that change the on-

screen keys viewed on the QWERTY keypad.

To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings

to default to the Samsung keypad.

The available text input modes are: Abc and Sym (symbols).

• Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number, symbol, and

emoticon keys. When in this mode, the input type button shows

?123

1. Press

and text

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔ Locale

➔

Select input method

➔

Samsung keypad

• Abc Mode: activates the default alphabetic keys. Press the Shift

key to toggle between Abc, ABC, or abc. When in this mode, the

input type button shows

ABC

Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym key displays. When in Sym mode, the ABC

key displays.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Abc Mode

Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the

key changes to

1. From within an active text entry screen, rotate the phone

counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.

The following screen displays:

and all letters that follow are in lower case.

3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.

4. Touch to send the message.

Text input field

Suggested Words

All lowercase

Displays when the next character is entered in

lowercase.

Initial Uppercase

Displays when the next character is entered as

uppercase but all subsequent characters are

lowercase.

All Uppercase

Displays when all characters will be entered as

uppercase characters.

Shift key Input Mode

Indicator

Current Mode

Settings Emoticons

2. Tap

to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once

ABC

?123

in this mode, the text input type shows

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Symbol/Numeric Mode

6. Tap

to return to ABC mode.

ABC

Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or

emoticons.

Using XT9 Predictive Text

XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and

regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing

the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.

1. Access a screen from where you can enter text.

2. Rotate the phone counterclockwise to a landscape

orientation, if desired.

Note: XT9 is only available when ABC mode is selected. XT9 advanced

settings are available only if the XT9 field has been selected.

?123

3. Tap

to configure the keyboard for Symbol

mode.Once in this mode, the text input type shows

The following screen displays:

ABC

1. Press

➔

and then tap

➔

Locale and text

➔

Samsung keypad.

– or –

From within an active text entry screen, tap

at the

bottom of the screen to access the Samsung keypad

settings screen.

2. Tap the XT9 field. A checkmark indicates activation.

3. Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the

following advanced options:

• Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to

complete the word you have started. (A green check mark indicates

the feature is enabled.)

4. Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.

1/3

5. Tap

button to cycle through additional pages.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered

before a word prediction is made. Choose from 2 letters, 3 letters,

4 letters, or 5 letters.

• XT9 auto-substitution allows you create a word rule by adding

words for automatic substitution during text entry (for example

youve becomes you’ve).

–

Tap the XT9 auto-substitution field. Flick up or down to review the

current list of word substitutions.

• Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical

errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the

characters of the keys you touched, and those of nearby

–

Press

and tap Add.

characters. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)

Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field (for

example, youve).

• Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter.

(A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)

–

Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field (for

example, you?fve).

• Auto-append automatically adds predictions to the word you are

typing. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)

Tap Done to save the substitution rule.

• Auto-substitution allows the device to automatically replace

misspelled or miskeyed words. This option reduce “typos.” (A green

check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)

4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

• Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused

when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys. (A green check

mark indicates the feature is enabled.

• Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list

after selecting the wrong word from the list.

• XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built-in XT9

dictionary.

–

Tap Add word.

Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new word.

Tap Done to store the new word.

Entering Text

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 6: Contacts

This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List.

You can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.

4. From the Manage

accounts area, tap

next to the account you

want to synchronize.

– or –

Accounts

From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to

synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you

want the applications to synchronize automatically. After

determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate

which account to synchronize with your Contacts list.

Tap Add account to create

a new account.

1. Sign in to your Google account.

5. Tap an account type to

2. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

add.

Accounts and sync

6. Follow the on-screen

instructions. The selected

account type

– or –

From the Home screen, press

Settings Accounts and sync

and then tap

➔

synchronizes with your Contacts list.

3. From the General sync settings section, touch one of the

following options:

• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the

background.

• Auto-sync: automatically synchronizes your data with the phone.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contacts List

Creating a Contact

Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters, contacts

stored on the phone can be lost.

The default storage location for

saving phone numbers to your

Contacts List is your phone’s

built-in memory.

•

SIM contacts are stored within the SIM Card.

Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry.

•

T-Mobile Contacts Backup contacts are stored remotely on the

T-Mobile servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has

been damaged or reset.

If existing Google and Corporate

email accounts have been

synchronized to your phone,

these will be made available to

your device during the creation

of new entries. These new

Contacts entries can be

assigned or saved to synced

accounts such as Phone, SIM,

Google, or Corporate.

Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can

also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail

account.

Microsoft Exchange (also known as Work or Outlook) contacts are

those contacts that are intended to be shared with either an Exchange

Server or from within Microsoft Outlook

Note: When storing an entry into your SIM card, note that only the Name, and

Number are saved. To save additional information for a particular

contact, such as notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that

Contact into your phone’s onboard memory.

Your phone automatically sorts the Contacts entries

alphabetically. You can create either a Phone

SIM, T-Mobile

Contacts Backup Google, or Exchange contact.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap to create a contact.

(Contacts).

Note: Before you can save a contact to the Phone, Contact settings must be

set to Save new contacts to Phone

•

Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. Enter additional information such as: Email

Ringtone Postal address Organization or More fields to

input additional category information.

IM, Groups,

Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad

and pressing and then tap Add to Contacts Create

➔

(

contact). Continue with step 3.

•

Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields

and categories.

3. Tap a destination type (Phone SIM, T-Mobile Contacts

backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange) (depending on

9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.

where you want to save the new contact information).

To save a Number from your Keypad:

4. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.

3. Tap Add to Contacts Create contact) or select the

(Phone).

for this contact using the displayed keypad.

5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.

➔

(

Selections are: Album, or Take photo

6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)

to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home Work

Work fax Home fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback

7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.

Contact entry from the on-screen list.

– or –

Press

and then tap Add to Contacts

➔

(Create

contact) or select the Contact entry from the on-screen list.

•

If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and

proceed to step 5.

•

Tap

on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously

entered phone number.

4. Tap a destination type (Phone

SIM, T-Mobile Contacts

backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange).

•

Tap

to enter an additional phone number

to remove a previously entered phone number.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name

Tap the Search contacts field and begin entering the entry’s

name. Matching entries are then displayed. This process

filters through all of your current account Contact entries to

only show you the matching entries.

for this contact.

6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)

to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home

Work fax Home fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback

7. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.

Work,

– or –

In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on

the right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through

the list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts

list. Touch the contact entry.

Note: For further details about how to enter characters, see “Text Input

Methods” on page 68.

Finding a Contact

You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names

onto either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an

external location (such as Google, Exchange, or T-Mobile

Backup). They are all physically separate but are used as a single

entity, called Contacts.

Tabs

Contacts

field

Create

Contact

Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the

maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may

differ.

Contacts

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

Tabbed

Navigation

2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.

– or –

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Editing Contact Information

Adding a Number to an Existing Contact

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap a contact name from the list.

2. Touch and hold an entry

and select Edit to reveal

the Contact entry’s

3. Press

and select Edit.

Note: You can also access an entry’s context menu by touching and holding

an entry then tapping Edit

details screen (page 81).

3. Touch a phone number

field and enter a phone

number.

4. Edit the contact information then tap Save

•

Tap

on the

QWERTY keyboard to

remove a previously

entered phone number.

Context

•

Tap

additional phone number

Tap to remove a

previously entered phone number.

4. Enter additional information such as: Email

Postal address Organization or More fields to input

additional category information.

to enter an

Contact Details Screen

•

IM, Ringtone,

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields

and categories.

• Display options: You can choose to only display contacts that have

phone numbers, sort by first or last name, display contacts first

name first or last name first, display contacts stored to your SIM

card, display contacts stored on your phone, and/or display

contacts stored to other accounts.

5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.

Deleting Contacts

• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the SIM card

or microSD card.

This option allows you to delete your contacts. You can delete all

your entries from your phone’s memory, your SIM card, FDN, or

All.

• Get friends: allows you to get contacts from your friends on

Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also get contacts from

Corporate or Google accounts.

Important!: Once Contacts List entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered.

• More

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select

Delete ➔ OK

–

Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on

Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also add Corporate or Google

accounts.

–

Speed dial: allows you to set up speed-dialing.

Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google account.

Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.

Contact List Options

1. From the Home screen, tap

My profile: allows you to set up a profile for yourself. The information

will be the same that you can add for a new contact.

2. Press

. The following options display:

–

Settings: allows you to configure where you save new contacts, or view

your Own numbers, or Service numbers.

• Create contact: allows you to create a new Contact entry.

• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an

existing group.

Contact Menu Options

1. From the Home screen,

• Mark as default: allows you to assign default numbers, email, etc..

for a selected Contact. For more information, refer to “Marking a

Contact as Default” on page 83.

tap

2. Touch and hold an entry to

reveal the context menu.

The following options

display:

• Send namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s

information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth Email

(Exchange or Internet), Gmail, or Messaging

Contact Entry Options

1. From the Home screen,

tap

• Edit: allows you to edit the

currently selected Contacts

entry.

• Delete: allows you to delete the

currently selected Contacts

entry.

2. Touch an entry to reveal the

Contact entry’s Overview

Screen. This screen contains

Name, contact numbers,

email, and linked contact

information.

• Join contact: allows you to link

the current contact to another current contact. Similar to a “see

also” feature. If you can’t remember a contact’s information, linking

entries can help you find the person you are looking for.

• Send contact information: allows you to send the current entry

info via text message.

3. Press

to reveal the

context menu specific to this

entry.

• Add to favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to

the list within the Favorites tab.

• Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current Contacts

entry from the Favorites tab.

Contact Overview Screen

4. Tap an available option.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any

updates contacts make to email account names, email

addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list.

Joining Contact Information

Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social

networking logins, and other similar account information. For

example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a

corporate email account login because they are maintained

separately and for different groups of people.

For more information about synchronizing accounts, see “Get

Friends” on page 87.

1. From the Home screen, tap

This device can synchronize with multiple accounts (such as

Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange Google, or

T-Mobile). When you synchronize your phone with those

accounts, each account creates a separate contact entry in the

Contacts list.

2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another

entry).

Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account

information.

If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account

that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account

under her maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat

account, when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list

you can join all of her entries and view the information in one

record.

3. Press

and then tap Join contact.

4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link).

The second contact is now linked with the first and the

account information is merged into one screen.

Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You

can select any account email address or information all from one

screen, versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate

the desired account information.

Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one

record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Marking a Contact as Default

Important!: It is the second contact image that is displayed for both buy the

first contact’s name that is used.

When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other

messaging type applications, the application needs to know

which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For

example, when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three

phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the

“default” number or entry.

For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie (second

entry). Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains. Tap the

Amy entry (showing the Julie image) to view both.

5. Touch the main linked contact to view the contact

information you linked. The contacts and information

displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate

what type of account information is contained in the entry.

The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to

use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple

entries for the same person (see Linked contacts).

Unjoining a Contact

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap a Contact entry.

2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you

3. Press

and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as

want to unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.

default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact

name, phone number, or other contact information.

Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account

information.

4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want

to be the primary information (such as name, phone

3. Tap the Joined contacts area.

number, or email) and select Save

4. Tap

next to the entry you want to unjoin. The

contacts are “unjoined” or separated and no longer display

in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go back to

being separately displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Bluetooth to transmit this contact to another bluetooth-compatible

Sending a Namecard

A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to

recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using

Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.

device.

• Email to attach the contact card to a new outgoing email (Exchange

or Internet).

• Gmail to attach the contact card to a new outgoing Internet-based

email.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Tap a Contact entry.

• Messaging to attach the contact card to a new outgoing text

message.

3. Press

and then tap Send via and select a delivery

Email, Gmail, or Messaging

Sending a namecard using Bluetooth

method: Bluetooth

You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a

recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on

page 76.

The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and

is delivered when you send the message.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Sending All Current Namecards

2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context

Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send

all of your current entries at once.

menu.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap Import/Export

via

3. Tap Send namecard via

➔

Bluetooth.

➔

Send namecard

Important!: You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.

3. Touch Select all to place a check mark alongside all

4. Touch the Bluetooth device in which to send this name

currently displayed Contact entries.

card. Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.

4. Touch Send and select a delivery method:

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card

Copying Contact Information

Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card

This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the

phone’s memory, onto the SIM card.

The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your

Contacts list is your phone’s built-in memory. This procedure

allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone’s memory, onto

the SIM card.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. From the Contacts List, press

and then tap

Import/Export

➔

Export to SD card.

Note: These must be contacts stored on the phone. External entries (Google,

3. Touch OK to choose all current phone contact entries.

Exchange, etc...) can not be transferred in this manner.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. From the Contacts List, press

and then tap

Import/Export

➔

Export to SIM card.

3. Touch Select all to choose all current phone contact

entries.

– or –

Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark

indicates a selection.

4. Touch Export. The name and phone number for the

selected contact is then copied to the SIM.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact

Synchronizing Contacts

information.

Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and

manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote

accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an

active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current

Contact entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.

Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and

Corporate accounts via the device.

Display Options

With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email

addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your

phone. For more information about syncing existing managed

accounts, see “Accounts and Synchronization” on page 192.

The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose

whether to display contacts saved from the Phone, SIM, T-Mobile

Contacts Backup, external source, or all. You can also choose to

display only contacts that have phone numbers.

1. Press

sync

➔

and then tap

➔

Accounts and

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap Display options. Configure any of

the following options:

2. Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish

to synchronize.

• Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those

contacts containing phone numbers.

3. Tap

within the adjacent account field to reveal the

account’s synchronization settings screen.

• Sort by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted: First

name or Last name

4. To synchronize Contacts, tap Sync Contacts. A green

• Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are

listed: First name first (ex: Steve Smith) or Last name first (Smith,

Steve).

checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.

Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes. If

• Choose contacts to display allows you to filter Contacts based on

after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated, repeat step 2-3.

category entries from within the locations such as: Phone

SIM,

T-Mobile Contacts Backup

Google, and Microsoft Exchange.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Tap Done

To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:

You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as

pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list.

All of their current contact information is then migrated over to

your phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly

different name, separate entries are created and can later be

linked (joined) together into a single entry.

Get Friends

When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,

MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the Get

Friends option synchronizes the data from the selected account

type with your Contacts list.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Important!: This process not only synchronizes your contact information but

2. Press

and then tap Get friends

➔

Add account

➔

also your status, events, and more.

Add account

1. Log into your Facebook account:

3. Determine which type of account information you want to

synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:

•

From the Home screen, tap

Facebook).

(

Applications

)

➔

(

Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync,

Tap I agree to accept the terms of the End-User License

Agreement.

Google, Facebook, Video Chat, or T-Mobile Contacts Backup

4. Tap an account type to add.

Enter your account’s access Email and Password information and

5. Follow the prompts. The selected account type

tap Login

synchronizes with your Contacts list.

Press

and then tap Home ➔ Friends to confirm your current

friends list.

6. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact

information. For more information, refer to “Joining

Contact Information” on page 82.

2. From the Home screen, tap

3. From the Contact’s tab, press

and then tap Get

friends

➔

Add account.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap Facebook from the Integrated contact accounts section

My Profile

of the Add an account screen.

You can send this Virtual Business Card (V-card) to other contacts

as an attachment. My Profile is the first Contact listed in the

Contacts list.

•

This process adds your Facebook account to the list of managed

and synchronized accounts. In this case, your Facebook contacts

are synchronized with your phone’s Contacts list.

Note: As with any profile, your profile can be associated with a group.

5. Tap Next and enter your account’s Email and Password

information.

To create My Profile:

6. Tap Log in to begin the synchronization process.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap More

7. Select a sync interval (from None to Once a day) and tap

➔

My profile.

3. Enter information into the various fields.

4. Tap Save to store the new entry.

To edit My Profile:

8. Tap those setting you wish to synchronize (all are enabled

by default). A green checkmark indicates the feature is

enabled.

1. With My profile displayed, press

2. Modify any of the information contained in My Profile, then

touch Save

and then tap Edit.

•

Choose from: Select Contacts to Sync

Sync all contacts, or

Sync Calendar

9. Tap Done to save these settings and return to Accounts and

sync screen.

10. Tap

to confirm your Facebook contacts are now

synchronized and appear in your Contacts list.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contact List Settings

Additional Contact Options

Sending an Email to a Contact

From this menu you can determine the default storage location

for Contacts, display you phone’s primary number, and view

service numbers listed in your Contact list.

Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can

use the Send email feature.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap More

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap More

contain an email address display.

➔

Settings.

➔

Send email. Contacts that

3. Select one of the following options:

• Save new contacts to: defines the default storage location of new

Contacts. Choose from: Always ask Phone SIM T-Mobile

3. Tap the contact to which you want to send an email. A

Contacts Backup Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync

check mark displays next to the selection.

• Own Numbers: displays the number for this device.

• Service Numbers: displays the list of Service Dialing Numbers

(SDN) assigned by your service provider. These numbers include

emergency numbers, customer service numbers and directory

inquiries.

Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen.

4. Tap Add

5. Select an email account type.

6. Compose the email and tap Send

Export/Import

For more information, refer to “Copying Contact Information” on

page 85.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing an Entry From a Caller Group

Groups

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Groups tab.

This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call

group. This group can be one of the already present groups

(Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.

2. Touch a group entry.

3. Press

and then tap Remove member.

Creating a New Caller Group

4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Groups tab.

A checkmark displays next to contact entry.

2. Press

and then tap Create group

5. Tap Remove.The contacts are removed from the group.

3. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to

enter a new group name. For more information, refer to

“Text Input Methods” on page 68.

Editing a Caller Group

To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part

of the selected group.

4. Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Groups tab.

Selections are: Default ringtone Sound, or Phone Ringtone.

2. Touch a group entry.

5. Tap Save to store the newly created group

3. Press

and then tap Edit group

Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group

4. Make modifications to the Group name or Ringtone fields.

For more information, refer to “Creating a New Caller

Group” on page 90.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Groups tab.

2. Tap a group entry ➔

(Add member).

3. From the list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you want to

5. Tap Save

add. A checkmark displays next to contact entry.

4. Tap Add. The selected contacts are added to the group.

Contacts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sending a Message to a Group

The Updates Tab

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

Groups tab.

From the Updates tab you can view updated contact information

that were synchronized with Facebook, Myspace, or Twitter.

2. Tap an existing group,

1. From the Home screen, tap

and press

and then

tap Send message

Note: You must log in to an SNS account (Facebook, Myspace or Twitter)

before you can view the Updates.

3. Select the recipients of

the new message

2. Tap the Updates tab. The updates display.

(indicated by a green

checkmark). If an entry

contains multiple phone

numbers, each must be

selected individually.

The History Tab

The History tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been

received, missed, and returned. For more information, refer to

“Call Logs Tab” on page 63.

1. From the Home screen, tap

4. Tap Send

5. Type your message, and

tap Send

2. Tap the History tab.

3. Press

. The following options are available:

• Delete: allows you to delete calls or messages from History. Select

a call or message and tap Delete

• Viewby: allows you to select the type of displayed calls, messages,

or emails. Selections are: Call, Message, Email, Facebook,

MySpace, Twitter, or Select all. Touch the items you want to display

then tap Done

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 7: Messages

This section describes how to send or receive different types of

messages. It also explains the features and functionality

associated with messaging.

The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and

receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio

messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.

To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service

provider’s multimedia message service.

Types of Messages

Your phone provides the following message types:

•

Text Messages

Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a

video clip to a text message changes the message from a text

message to a multimedia message.

Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages

Audio Postcards

IM Messages

Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and

indicate when messages are received and their type. For more

information, refer to “Indicator Icons” on page 23.

Email and Gmail Messages

Google Talk

1. From the Home screen, tap

message

(Messaging) ➔ New

Message Icons on the Status Bar

Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display

when new messages are received. For more information, refer to

“Status Bar” on page 23.

2. Tap on the To field to manually enter a recipient or select

one of the following:

Creating and Sending Messages

• Recent: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages.

The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text

messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.

To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service

provider’s message service.

• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries

must have a wireless phone number or email address).

• Group: to select a recipient from the Group list.

Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. If adding a recipient from either Recent, Contacts, or

Group, touch the contact to place a checkmark then tap

Add. The contact displays in the recipient field.

• Add/Remove subject: inserts or deletes a Subject field in your

message.

• Add/Remove Cc/Bcc: allows you to copy or blind copy other

numbers. You may manually enter a number or choose from

Recent, Contacts, or Group. You may also delete existing Cc/Bcc

numbers.

Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less than 10, all

members in the group are added. Delete any unnecessary members in

the list by selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted entries.

• Attach: allows you to attach the following:

–

Slideshow: allows you to create up to a 10 page slideshow to

attach to the message.

4. Tap the Type to compose field and use the on-screen

keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer to

“Text Input Methods” on page 68.

Pictures: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to

add it to your message.

Videos: allows you to tap an existing video file you wish to attach, then

5. Add more recipients by touching the Recipient field.

select Add

Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio

list, then add it to your message by tapping OK

6. Review your message and tap Send.

Capture picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a

photo with phone’s camera, then add it to your message by touching

Note: If you exit a message before you touch send the message

automatically saves as a draft.

Save

–

Capture video: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record a

video clip using the phone’s, then add it to your message by

Message Options

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Messaging).

touching Save

2. From within an open message, press

to display

Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record an

audio clip using the phone’s microphone, then add it to your message

additional messaging options:

by tapping

➔

Add.

• View contact: reveals the current Contact’s overview screen.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–

Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry to

add their contact info to your message.

2. Tap

to play a multimedia message.

3. In a single motion, touch and scroll up or down the page to

scroll through the message (if additional pages were

added).

Calendar: allows you to tap on an existing Calendar event and add it

to your message.

Memo: allows you to tap on an existing Memo and add it to your

message.

Message Threads

• Add text: allows you to add text items from sources such as:

Contacts, Calendar, Memo, and Text templates.

Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into

message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see all the

messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and displays a

contact on the screen.

• More: provides the following additional options:

Insert smiley, Delete messages, Discard, or Call.

Viewing Newly Received Messages

Message threads are listed in the order in which they were

received, with the latest message displayed at the top.

When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by

displaying

within the Notification area at the top left of

your Home screen.

To read a message:

1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For

more information, refer to “Notification Bar” on page 26.

– or –

From the Home screen, tap

then tap the new

message to view. The selected message displays on the

screen.

Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To reply to a text message:

To access additional Bubble options:

Current Recipient

My Text

1. From the Home screen,

ᮣ

Touch and hold the message bubble to display the

following options:

tap

• Delete message: deletes the currently selected message bubble

2. While the message is

open, tap the Type to

from the thread.

• Add to Contacts: adds the current caller to your Contacts list.

compose field and then

type your reply message.

• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble

from the thread.

3. Compose your reply.

Your texts are colored

Blue and your caller’s

reply’s are Yellow.

• Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected

message bubble from being accidentally deleted.

• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message

bubble to an external recipient.

• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as a

single text message within the SIM card.

4. Tap Send to review your

• View message details: displays details for the currently selected

message bubble.

reply.

– or –

Reply Bubble

Text Message Thread

Press

Send to select one of

these messaging options: View contact

Bcc Attach Add text Insert smiley, or More (Insert smiley,

Delete messages, Discard, and Call).

and then tap

Add subject, Add Cc/

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in

which to search, then tap

Deleting Messages

Deleting a single message

1. From the Home screen, tap

4. All messages that contain the entered search string

display.

2. Touch and hold a message, then select Delete thread

Messaging Settings

3. At the prompt, tap Yes to delete or No to cancel.

To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia

messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.

Deleting multiple messages

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap Settings

2. Press and then tap Delete Threads

3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark

The following Messaging settings are available:

displays beside each selected message.

Storage settings

4. Tap Delete

• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is

reached, rather than overwriting them.

5. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the

• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text

process.

messages are allowed in one conversation.

Message Search

You can search through your messages by using the Message

Search feature.

• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many

multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.

Text message (SMS) settings

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press and then tap Search

• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs

you whether or not your message was delivered.

• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the

messages stored on the SIM card.

Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notification settings

• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your message

center where your messages reside while the system is attempting

to deliver them.

• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your

status bar.

• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text

messages. Choose GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic.

• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message

notifications.

Multimedia message (MMS) settings

Text Templates

• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs

you whether or not your message was delivered.

This screen displays your available text message reply

templates. This is a readily accessible list of both default and

user-defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to

incoming messages.

• Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone receives a

request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient.

• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve

messages.

1. From the Home screen, tap

• Roaming auto-retrieve: allows the message system to

2. From the Messaging list, press

and then tap Text

automatically retrieve while roaming.

templates

• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,

Restricted, or Warning.

3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current

message conversation.

–

Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content

belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.

Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are

creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content

Domain.

–

Free: you may add any content to the message.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To create your own text template:

6. Tap Send to send the Audio Postcard.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. rom the Messaging list, press

and then tap Text

Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email

using several email services. You can also receive text message

alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email

application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts

simultaneously in one convenient location.

templates

3. Tap

(Create template).

4. Enter a new text string and tap Save

There are currently three main types of email accounts on your

phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and

Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook ).

Sending an Audio Postcard

In this menu you can select a frame, take a picture and then

record a voice message up to one minute long and send it as an

Audio Postcard.

To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet

Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to

access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private

Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Audio Postcard).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Touch and slide the screen left or right to select a frame for

•

IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently

used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current

standard.

this Audio postcard message.

3. Center the subject in the viewfinder and touch the Camera

•

POP (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs

(Internet service providers) and common among consumer

applications. POP3 is the current standard.

key.

4. Tap Record to record an audio message.

5. Tap Send to and select from one of the following options:

Contacts

New Phone Number, New E-mail Address, Recent

Recipients, or Online Album

Messages

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating an Email Account

7. Tap Done to store the new account.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Important!: Only some “Plus” accounts include POP access allowing this

program to connect. If you are not able to sign in with your

correct email address and password, you may not have a paid

“Plus” account. Launch the Web browser to access your

account.

(Email). If you already have email accounts, your accounts

screen is displayed

2. Enter you email address in the Email address field. The

phone will try to resolve

Opening an Email

1. From the Home screen, tap

3. Enter your password in the Password field, tap Next then

➔

(Email).

press Next

2. Press and then tap Accounts

•

Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually

(POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the

information specific to your email provider.

3. Select an email account and tap an email message.

Refreshing Email messages

•

The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from

other email accounts accessed by your device.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

2. Select an email account.

4. Touch Next at the Your accounts screen.

3. Press

and then tap Refresh.

5. At the prompt name the account and enter a screen name

to identify yourself on this account. If you have already

setup this account, skip to step 6.

Composing Email

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

6. Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You

can also view Personal information for this account,

Receipts (if you setup the account to return receipts),

Travel information, and more (if available).

2. Press

and then tap Accounts

3. Select an email account.

4. Tap Inbox and press

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Tap Compose

• Email check frequency: Tap to adjust the time interval used by

your device to check your email account for new email messages.

6. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.

• Default account: Assign this account as the default email account

used for outgoing messages.

•

If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate

the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message

recipients as you want.

• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to appear

within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new Internet

mail (Gmail, etc..) is received.

7. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.

• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email

8. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.

message is received.

•

To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the

screen) and make a selection.

• Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is

received.

9. Once complete, tap Send

• Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such

as username, password, and IMAP server.

Configuring Email Settings

• Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing settings, such as

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

username, password, and SMTP server.

2. Press

and then tap Accounts

• Recent messages: Lets you assign the number of recent

messages that are displayed on-screen. Choose from: 25 - Total.

3. Select an account.

4. From the email list screen, press

• Forward with files: Lets you include attachments when forwarding

an email.

and then tap More

➔

Account Settings

• Add signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the

bottom of all outgoing emails.

5. Alter any of the following settings:

• Signature: Lets you create an email signature for your outgoing

Gmail email messages.

• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display

name.

• Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your

outgoing email messages.

Messages

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. When prompted to provide additional detailed information,

scroll down the screen and tap Next

5. Enter a Domain, and confirm your Username, and Password

information and tap Next

Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)

Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook

Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft

Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email

application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and

Calendar information directly with your company’s Exchange

server.

•

If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Accept all SSL

certificates field to place a check mark in the box and activate this

additional level.

Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account

Important!: If your exchange server requires this feature, leaving this field

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

unchecked can prevent connection.

2. If you already have other email account setup:

6. If prompted with a connection error, manually enter your

•

Press

and then tap Accounts

Exchange server information within the appropriate field.

and then tap Add account

• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address.

Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from

your company network administrator. Do not accept the default

entry as this is a guess based on returned information.

– or –

Enter your Email address and Password information, and

then tap Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for

further details and support.

7. With the new server information entered, tap Next

8. Read the on-screen activation disclaimer and, if prompted,

tap OK

9. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap

• Email address: your Outlook work email address.

• Password: typically your network access password (case-

sensitive).

3. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new

email account screen).

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10. Identify your new account with a unique name and provide

•

If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate

the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message

recipients as you want.

the outgoing name text then tap Done

Opening an Exchange Email

6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Email).

7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.

2. Press and then tap Accounts

•

To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the

screen) and make a selection.

3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email

•

Tap the file you wish to attach and tap OK

message.

8. Once complete, tap Send

Refreshing Exchange Email

Deleting an Exchange Email Message

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Select an exchange email account.

3. Press and then tap Refresh

➔

(

Email).

ᮣ

Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select

Delete from the on-screen context menu.

– or –

Composing Exchange Email

1. From the Home screen, tap

With the email message displayed, press

tap Delete

and then

➔

(

Email).

2. Press

and then tap Accounts

Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings

3. Select an exchange email account.

4. Tap Inbox and press and then tap Compose

5. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

➔

Accounts and

sync.

2. Tap

within the Microsoft Exchange account field to

reveal the account’s synchronization settings screen.

Messages

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Toggle either the Sync Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to

force the device to manually resync either the exchange

Contacts or Calendar entries.

• Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon

when new email messages have been received.

• Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or

upcoming event is pending.

– or –

• Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is

pending.

Tap Account settings and specify any other email settings

• Incoming settings provides access to the Domain, password, and

exchange server settings.

you wish to synchronize:

• Account name displays the name used by the device to track the

account.

• SyncContacts synchronizes the contacts between your phone and

the remote exchange server.

• Your name displays the name used in the From field within your

outgoing email messages.

• Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries

between your phone and the remote exchange server.

• Amount to synchronize to assign the sync range for your incoming

and outgoing email messages between your phone and your

external exchange server. How many days worth of email

• Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync

calendar events.

• Add signature activates the email signature feature.

messages should the phone and server synchronize. Choose from:

1 day 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month.

• Signature allows you to create an outgoing email signature

attached to new email messages sent from your phone.

• Default account assigns this account as the default used when

sending out new email messages.

4. Press

to return to the previous page.

• Out of office settings assigns this account’s out of office settings.

• Empty Server Trash: allows you to delete your email account’s

trash bin remotely.

• Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule.

• Email size configures the incoming email size allowed to pass

through to your phone automatically without user interaction. Larger

emails will have to be retrieved manually.

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Refreshing Google Mail

Using Google Mail

ᮣ

From within the Gmail message list, press

and then

Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first

setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the

synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized

with your Gmail account.

tap Refresh to send and receive new emails and

synchronize your email with the Gmail account.

Composing a Gmail Message

1. From the Home screen, tap

Signing into Google Mail

➔

(

Gmail).

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Gmail).

2. From the Gmail Inbox, press

and then tap Compose

Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features

3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.

such as Google Mail and Android Market.

Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.

2. Tap Next to add a Google account.

3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.

4. Press

and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind

– or –

copy.

Tap Sign in if you have a Google account.

5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.

The Inbox loads conversations and email.

6. Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your

Opening Gmail

message.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Gmail).

7. Once complete tap

(Send).

2. Tap an existing email message.

Messages

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Viewing a Gmail Message

Google Talk

1. From the Gmail Inbox, touch a message to view. The

following options are available:

Google Talk™ is a free Windows and web-based application for

instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are

automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This

allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail

accounts.

• Archive: archives the selected Email.

• Delete: deletes the Email.

• <: displays older Emails.

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Talk).

• >: displays newer Emails.

2. Tap Next to add a Google account.

2. Press

options:

to select one of the following additional

3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.

– or –

• Change labels: changes the label on the email or conversation.

Tap Sign in if you have a Google account. The Inbox loads

• Add/Remove star: click a message's star to add or remove the

star (just like clicking flags in Outlook).

conversations and email.

• Mark unread: unread messages or threads with unread messages

display in boldface text in the Inbox.

4. After entering your user name and password, tap the Down

Navigation key.

• Go to Inbox: displays the Google Mail Inbox.

• Mute: mutes the conversation.

5. Tap Sign in.

• More

6. Begin using Google Talk.

–

Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.

Select text: allows you to select text to copy and paste.

Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings.

Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This could take up to

5 minutes to complete.

Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help

information.

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 8: Multimedia

This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your

phone, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, and how

to manage your photos, images and sounds.

2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,

adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.

3. Before you take a picture, zoom in or out by using either:

This section explains how to use the camera on your phone. You

can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in

camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG

format.

•

The Up and Down Volume keys.

Tapping the screen with two fingers and then dragging outwards.

You can magnify the picture up to x4 (400 percent).

4. If desired, before taking the photo, touch the left tab to

Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.

Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.

Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with

another person’s privacy.

access various camera options and settings.

5. You can also touch the screen to move the focus to the

area you touch.

Using the Camera

6. Press the Camera key until the shutter sounds. (The picture

is automatically stored within your designated storage

location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures are stored

on the Phone.) For more information, refer to “Camera and

Camcorder Options” on page 107.

Taking Photos

Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as

choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the

camera key.

Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows

may appear on the photo.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Camera).

Multimedia

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in

various modes. Once you change the mode, the

corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the

display. Choose from Camera or Camcorder.

3. Shooting mode: allows you to set the following options:

• Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before returning to the

shooting mode.

• Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your subject. Once

the camera detects the person’s smile, it takes the picture.

• Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an initial photo and

then adding additional images to itself. The guide box lets you view

the area where the second part of the panoramic picture should fall

within.

Camera and Camcorder Options

You can change options using your keypad in capture mode.

Camera Options

• Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features.

The following short cuts are available for the camera:

• Continuous: takes a succession of consecutive photos by pressing

and holding the Camera key.

Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Touch the screen to display

the tab, then touch the tab to view these options.

• Vintage: gives your photo a vintage look (hazy around the edges).

Touch the icon in the lower left corner of the display screen to

choose a Normal, Warm, Cool, or Mono effect.

1. Front/Rear: allows you to activate either the front facing or

rear camera lenses.

• Add me: combines people with existing background. Touch the

screen to pick which side of the screen to focus on. Press the

camera key. Focus on a background and press the camera key a

second time.

• Cartoon: gives your photo a cartoon look.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Action shot: detects action and creates a panorama of the moving

• Scene mode: to select a camera setting for better image capture

under different lighting environments. Choose from: None (default),

Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,

Sunset, Dawn, Fall color, Firework, Text, Candlelight and Backlight.

object.

4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or

saving pictures. Selections are: Recent recipient

Phone

• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camera takes the

photo. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,

2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the

camera takes the photo after the specified time elapses.

Book Online Album New Email, or New Number

5. Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on

the subject through the lens sensor while taking a

picture.Touch and drag the slider to the left (to decrease

the value), to the right (to increase the value). You can also

touch the Minus icon (to decrease the value) or the Plus

icon (to increase the value).

• Resolution: sets the photo resolution to: 2560x1920, 2560x1536,

2048x1536, 2048x1232, 1600x1200, 1600x960, 640x480, or

800x480.

• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following

choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.

• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects

to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,

or Sepia.

6. Quick view: displays the photo for quick viewing.

7. Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in Camera

• ISO: allows you to adjust the ISO sensitivity of the camera imaging

sensor. Selections are: ISO Auto, ISO 100, ISO 200, ISO 400, or

ISO 800 speed.

mode.

8. Settings: displays two types of settings, Camera (first tab)

• Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or meters

the light source: Centre weighted, Spot, or Matrix.

and General settings (second tab).

Camera settings

• Anti-shake: allows you to touch On to activate Anti-Shake, or Off to

deactivate it.

• Outdoor visibility: enhances LCD visibility outdoors.

• Auto contrast: automatically sets the contrast.

• Focus mode: sets the focus mode to: Auto focus, Macro (close up

photos), or Face detection (recognizes there is a face in the shot

and optimizes exposure for it).

• Blink detection: camera detects the user's blinks and adjusts to

capture the subject perfectly.

Multimedia

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to: Superfine,

HD Camcorder Options

Fine, or Normal.

You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. The

following short cuts are available:

• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness

for this photo.

General settings

• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly

set up each shot.

• Review: displays the photo for review. Selections are: Off, 3 sec, or

On.

• Shutter sound: allows you to select a tone to play when the

camera’s shutter opens and closes. Sound selections are Sound 1,

Sound 2, Sound 3, or Off.

• Reset: resets the camera settings to the default settings.

• Firmware update: allows you to Check version by network, or

Firmware update.

1. Camcorder / Camera Mode: allows you to record a video

various modes. Once you change the mode, the

corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the

display. Choose from Camcorder or Camera.

2. Recording mode: Normal or Limit for MMS.

3. Resolution: sets the video resolution to: 1280x720,

720x480, 640x480, 320x240, or 176x144.

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Default Dest.: sets the default destination for sending or

saving videos. Selections are: Recent recipient, Phone

Book, Online Album, New Email, or New Number.

• White balance: allows you to set this option from the following

choices: Auto, Cloudy, Fluorescent, Daylight, or Incandescent.

• Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply special effects

to the photo. Options include: Normal, Black and White, Negative,

or Sepia.

5. Exposure: sets the total amount of light allowed to fall on

the subject through the lens sensor while recording a

video. Touch and drag the slider to the left to decrease the

value, or to the right to increase the value. Or touch the

Minus icon to decrease the value, or the Plus icon to

increase the value.

• Video quality: allows you to set the video quality to: Superfine, Fine,

or Normal.

• Adjust: allows you to adjust the Contrast, Saturation and Sharpness

for this video.

General settings

• Guidelines: displays alignment or framing guidelines to perfectly

set up each recording.

6. Quick view: displays the video for quick viewing.

• Audio recording: activates audio recording feature so you can

record audio while recording the video.

7. Camera button: records a video when pressed in

Camcorder mode.

• Review: set to On to review the recorded video.

8. Settings: displays two types of settings, Camcorder (first

• Reset: resets the camcorder settings to the default settings.

tab) and General settings (second tab).

Camcorder settings

• Outdoor visibility: enhances LCD visibility outdoors.

• Timer: allows you to set a time delay before the camcorder records

the video. Select the length of delay you want and touch the Off,

2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec. When you press the Camera key, the

camcorder records the video after the specified time elapses.

Multimedia

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options

Camera Gallery Options

After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various

options.

The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera

images.

Photo options

1. From the Home screen,

• Share: allows you to share a picture using AllShare, Audio

Postcard, Bluetooth, Picassa, Facebook, Messaging, Gmail, Kodak,

or Snapfish.

tap

(

Applications

)

➔

(Gallery).

• Set as: sets the photo as a Contact icon, Home screen Wallpaper,

2. Select a folder location

(ex: Camera) and select

an image by tapping it

once to place a green

check mark on the file.

or Lock screen Wallpaper.

• More

–

Send to My Album Online: sends this photo to My Album Online.

Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,

Contacts, Online album, New Email address, or New Phone number.

–

Delete: deletes this photo.

3. Press

from this

Video options

main Gallery screen to

reveal gallery-specific

• Share: allows you to share a video using AllShare, Bluetooth,

YouTube, Messaging, Gmail, Kodak, and Snapfish.

options Share

Delete,

• Play: plays the current video using either doubletwist or Video

Player.

and More

• More

–

Send to My Album Online: sends this video to My Album Online.

Set Default Destination: sets the default photo location to: Recent log,

Contacts, Online album, New Email address, or New Phone number.

–

Delete: deletes this video.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Camera Image Options

When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Photo folder. You

can view your pictures immediately or view them anytime in the

Photo folder.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the

Image viewer. Touch and drag a picture to the left to see

the next picture or to the right to see the previous picture.

3. Tap Slideshow to initiate an on-screen slideshow

displaying every image in the current folder.

– or –

Tap Menu to display the following image menu options:

• Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Audio

Postcard, Bluetooth, Picasa, Facebook, Messaging, Email, Gmail,

Kodak, or Snapfish.

• Delete allows you to delete the current image.

Multimedia

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• More: provides you with the additional options such as:

3. With the image displayed, tap Menu

Contact icon

4. Tap a contact to make a selection.

5. Crop the image and tap Save

➔

Set as

➔

–

Send to My Album Online: allows you to send the file to your

pre-configure My Album Online.

–

Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take

after taking an image (Recent log, Phonebook, Online album, Email

address or Phone number).

Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper

–

Details: files details such as Title, Type, Date taken, Album, Location,

latitude, Longitude, etc..

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Show on map: allows you to view location information for a selected

file if it was stored upon creation.

(Gallery).

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the

Set as: allows you to assign a picture to one of three location: Home

screen Wallpaper, Lock screen Wallpaper, or to a Contact’s icon image.

Image viewer.

Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current

picture. Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or

Discard to ignore any changes.

3. With the image displayed, tap Menu

➔

Set as.

4. Select one of the two options:

–

Add to Slideshow: adds the selected photo to a custom slideshow.

•

Home screen Wallpaper assigns the current image to the home

screen background. This image is spread across all available

screens.

Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a

counterclockwise direction.

–

Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a

clockwise direction.

Lock screen Wallpaper assigns the selected image to the

background for the lock screen.

Assigning an Image as a Contact Icon

Applications) ➔

5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture.

Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out

to create a cropped area.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(

2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the

Image viewer.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image.

– or –

3. Press the record video key ( ) to begin shooting video.

4. Touch to pause the recording or touch to stop the

Tap Discard to stop without updating the wallpaper image.

recording and save the video file to your Photo folder.

5. Once the file is saved, tap Play to play your video for

Using the HD Camcorder

In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a

camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send high

definition videos.

review.

6. Press

to return to the viewer.

Camcorder Options

Note: To ensure the Camcorder can record the video, use an SDHC memory

Camcorder options are represented by icons across both sides of

the screen.

card.

For more information, refer to “Camera and Camcorder Options”

on page 107.

Shooting Video

Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is

recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by

having the light source behind you.

Accessing Videos

When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder.

You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in

the Camera folder.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(

HD Camcorder) to activate the camcorder mode.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(

Applications) ➔

2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,

(

adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.

Multimedia

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video

1. From the Home screen, tap

Amazon MP3).

(Applications) ➔

playback.

– or –

(

2. Tap one of the categories to begin browsing the

Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to

select the video (green check mark) and display the

following video menu context options:

music files.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to download music.

Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please

• Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Bluetooth,

YouTube, Messaging, Email, Gmail, Kodak, or Snapfish.

contact your service provider for further details.

• Delete allows you to delete chosen/selected pictures. Touch the

checkmark, to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to

delete, then touch Delete.

Files

Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,

bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one

convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if

the associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4 and

DivX).

• More: provides you with the additional options such as:

–

Send to My Album Online: allows you to send the file to your

pre-configure My Album Online.

–

Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take

after shooting video (Recent log, Phonebook, Online album, New Email

address or New Phone number).

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Files).

(Applications) ➔

(

–

Details: displays video file information.

Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders,

Amazon MP3

subfolders, etc.

Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by

Amazon.com. Using Amazon MP3 you can download DRM-Free

(digital rights management) MP3 formatted songs and albums.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Opening and Navigating within Files

The Gallery

DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the

device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.

The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For

photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a

slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as

a picture message.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Files).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your

Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the

Gallery, access Files and remove some of the media files from the

folders, and then open the Gallery.

selected file.

• Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory.

Opening the Gallery

• Home tab allows you to back up to the root directory.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Gallery). For more information, refer to “Camera

Gallery Options” on page 111.

(Applications) ➔

•

Press

displayed on-screen. Choose from: List

Thumbnail

Press

Delete

Bluetooth visibility and Settings).

and then tap View by to change the way the files are

(

List and details, or

•

for these additional options: Share

Create folder

Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage card,

Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top left album

contains all the pictures in the storage card.

View by List by, and More (Move, Copy, Rename,

3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to

launch the associated application.

Multimedia

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. From the Home screen, tap

Airsync).

5. Read the on-screen description and tap Yes

(Applications) ➔

doubletwist

The doubletwist Player is the best all-in-one music, radio and

video application.

(

In conjunction with the Airsync application on your phone, it

wirelessly syncs your iTunes playlists, music, photos and

videos between your computer and your Android Phone over your

home Wi-Fi network. For more details visit:

6. Write down the on-screen passcode and follow the

on-screen instructions to pair your phone wirelessly to the

communicating computer using the doubletwist

application.

http://www.doubletwist.com

From the Home screen, tap

doubletwist).

Installing Doubletwist

ᮣ

(Applications) ➔

Using the Video Player

The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card.

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

1. Download doubletwist for your Mac and PC from the

(Video Player). A list of videos sorted on the SD card

doubletwist website.

displays in the Video list.

2. Touch a video file to begin viewing.

INCEPTION

Note: Upon initial launch, the doubletwist application provides the option to

email you a link for the needed application.

The movie INCEPTION comes preloaded on the memory card

included with this phone.

2. Install the application on the same computer containing

your ITunes application and library. Follow the on-screen

installation instructions.

1. Confirm the preloaded memory card is in the SD slot. For

more information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory

Card” on page 9.

3. Verify both your phone and computer are communicating

via the same Wi-Fi router

2. From the Home screen, tap

(Inception).

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Log into Media Hub (required the first time you tap the

icon). For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on

page 118. The movie plays back within the built-in video

player application.

Creating a New Media Hub Account

Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an

account. Enter the required information.

1. From the Home screen, tap

MediaHub).

and tap My Account

3. Use the keypad to enter the required information, then tap

Create Account

4. From the My Account screen, you can edit parameters

such as: My Details My Purchases My Payment Methods

Manage My Devices Logout, or Reset Media Hub

Using Media Hub

(Applications) ➔

(

Warning!: If the microSD card is accidentally reformatted, or the movie file is

manually deleted, you will be unable to retrieve or replace the

deleted movie file.

2. Press

Media Hub

Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and

TV content. With hundreds of titles available, entertaining your

family on the go was never easier. You can rent or purchase your

favorite content and watch from any location. Featuring the

stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media

Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you've never

experienced it before.

1. From the Home screen, tap

MediaHub).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap

Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.

Accept to continue or Decline to exit.

Important!: You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G connection to preview and

download a media file.

3. At the Media Hub screen select one of the following

options:

You must have a microSD card installed prior to initiating the

service. This card acts as a storage location for your downloaded

rental or purchase.

• What’s new: shows recently added media that is available for rent

or purchase.

Multimedia

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have

•

You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you’d

like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a

later point in time subject to content re-download availability and

studio permissions.

purchased or rented. Touch a media entry to view it.

• Movie Store: displays movies that are available for rent or

purchase. Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the

screen. Touch a category and movies of that type display.

•

You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have

acquired through the Service.

• TV Store: displays TV shows that are available for purchase. Scroll

through the movie categories at the top of the screen. Touch a

category and TV shows of that type display.

You must have Wi-Fi or 4G/HSPA+ connectivity in order to download

Media Content.

4. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you

Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be

viewable on only 1 device in your account.

would like to purchase or rent.

•

Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.

5. Tap WATCH PREVIEW to watch a short preview or tap Rent

Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks

where there is a weak signal.

or Own

6. Choose a payment method and then follow the on-screen

•

You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)

license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media

Content has been buffered.

instructions. The media stores to the My Media folder.

Media Hub Notices

Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you

create an account in Media Hub.

You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive

hours of start of playback.

•

Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not

extend the available viewing time.

•

Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up

to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same

account.

•

You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than

once every 30 days.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of

more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after

the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing

rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction,

but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content

may not be available for the entire twenty-four (24) consecutive

hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond

the thirty (30) day rental window).

Pause the song.

Start the song after pausing.

Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to

previous song.

Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go

to next song.

Volume control.

•

You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub

through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.

Music Player

Playing Music

5.1^Ch

Allows you to listen to music using 5.1 Virtual

Surround Sound.

( ( ) )

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Plays the entire song list once.

(

Music Player). Music player tips display.

2. Touch Done

3. Touch a tab to select the music category: All

Albums Artists or Genres

Repeats the currently playing song.

Replays the current list when the list ends.

shuffles the current list of songs randomly.

songs play in order and are not shuffled.

Playlists,

4. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.

Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is

connected through the earphone port only.

5. The following Music Player controls are available:

Multimedia

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Music Player Options

Using Playlists

The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for

the music player such as whether you want the music to play in

the background, sound effects, and how the music menu

displays.

Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.

These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this

device, or using a third-party application (such as Windows

Media Player) and downloading those files to an SD card inserted

into the device.

ᮣ

With the music player application displayed, press

and select one of the following options:

Creating a Playlist

1. From the Home screen, tap

Music Player).

2. Tap the Playlists tab.

3. Press Create

4. Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new

name for this playlist, then tap Save

(Applications) ➔

• Add to quicklist: adds the selected music file to a quick playlist.

(

• Via Bluetooth: plays the music through a Bluetooth stereo headset.

• Share music via: shares a music file via AllShare, Bluetooth,

Messaging, Email, or Gmail.

➔

• Set as: sets this song as a Phone ringtone, Individual ringtone, or

Alarm tone.

• Go to disc view: displays the selections in a circular, cd disc view.

• More:

Adding Music to a Playlist

–

Add to playlist: adds a song to the playlist.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Music Player).

2. Tap the Playlists tab.

3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.

(Applications) ➔

Settings: allows you to activate or deactivate the Equalizer, Effect, or

visualization. Also allows you to set which Music menus you want to

display. Selections are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Folders, Composers,

Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently added. Touch each

item that you want to display in the Music menu.

(

–

Stop playing music: stops playing the currently selected song or

playlist.

Details: displays details about the selected music.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Press

– or –

Tap

and tap Add

Editing a Playlist

Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can

also share, delete, or rename the playlist.

(

Add music).

Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default

playlists can not be renamed.

Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song name

from the main screen to open the context menu. Select Add to playlist

1. From the Home screen, tap

Music Player).

2. Tap the Playlists tab.

(Applications) ➔

(

5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music tracks

to this playlist then tap Add

3. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen

Removing Music from a Playlist

context menu.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(

Music Player).

4. Tap Edit title

2. Tap the Playlists tab.

5. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap Save

3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.

Transferring Music Files

4. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context

Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two

methods:

menu.

1. Downloaded to the phone from or Android Market.

5. Tap Remove

➔

OK.

Music files are directly stored on your phone.

2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.

Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.

For more information, refer to “USB Settings” on page 192.

Multimedia

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Removing Music Files

1. From the Home screen, tap

Note: T-Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be

used. During this initial registration process, any current Wi-Fi

connections must be disabled.

(Applications) ➔

(Music Player).

3. Tap Disable Wi-Fi if you currently have an active Wi-Fi

2. Tap the All tab.

connection.

3. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen

4. Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30-day trial of the service.

context menu.

5. Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing: Live

4. Tap Delete

➔

OK. The music file(s) is deleted.

Channels

Browse, or Live Channels

YouTube

Live TV On Demand, My media, More Info,

T-Mobile TV

T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and

Video on Demand.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload

and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.

(T-Mobile TV). The T-Mobile Terms and Conditions

1. From the Home screen, tap

YouTube).

2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or

touch Exit

(Applications) ➔

page displays.

(

Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please

contact your service provider for further details.

2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or

3. When the screen loads you can begin searching and

touch Exit

viewing posted videos.

4. Press

➔

Settings

➔

High quality on mobile if you

prefer high quality output.

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 9: Applications and Development

Thissectionoutlinesthevariousapplicationsthatareavailableon

your phone.

Accounts and sync

This application allows you to configure general synchronization

settings that determine whether the background data is

synchronized, and whether you automatically synchronize data

with the phone.

Applications

The Applications list provides quick access to all the available

applications on the phone.

For more information, refer to “Accounts and Synchronization”

on page 192.

Refer to the application table on page 35 for a description of each

Application, its function, and how to navigate through that

particular application. If the application is already described in

another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to

that particular section is provided.

Add to Home

This shortcut allows you to add Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or

Wallpapers to the Home screen. For more information, refer to

“Adding and Deleting Screens” on page 43.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Add to Home).

(Applications) ➔

(

Note: You can also locate an empty area of a selected screen and touch and

hold an area to launch the Add to Home screen popup.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

124

compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital

multimedia streamer.

AirSync

This application helps to wirelessly sync your iTunes playlists,

music, photos and videos between your computer and your

Android Phone over your home Wi-Fi network. For more details

visit: http://www.doubletwist.com . For more information, refer to

“doubletwist” on page 117.

Important!: You must activate Wi-Fi to use this application. For more

information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on page 171.

1. From the Home screen, tap

AllShare).

2. Follow the on-screen prompts.

(Applications) ➔

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Airsync).

Alarm & Clocks

(Applications) ➔

(

The application contains three separate streaming media

options:

Here you can set an alarm, configure and view the World clock,

use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The applications display in a

tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger.

For more information, refer to “Alarm and Clocks” on page 168.

• Play file from my phone on another player allows you to play

local device content on a Wi-Fi capable TV or playback device. The

phone can then be used as a remote to control playback.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Alarm & Clocks).

(Applications) ➔

• Play file from server on my phone allows you to receive and

playback media stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on

your device.

(

AllShare

• Play file from server on another player via my phone allows you

to “piggy-back” content playback on an external Wi-Fi TV/receiver.

Your phone retrieves content from an external wireless source (eg.,

server) and pushes it through to an external wireless destination

(eg., TV). The phone acts to both route the media and control its

playback (as a remote).

This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile

phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on

who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen

monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.

Allows users to share their in-device media content with other

external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network

Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNA-

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring AllShare Settings

2. Tap

adjacent to one of the selected transmission

methods. (This procedure assumes selection of the first

option).

The AllShare™ application must first be configured prior to its

initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-FI,

Items to share, source server address, and external device

acceptance rights.

3. If transmitting local media to an external device, scroll

through your microSD card folders to locate the file(s) you

wish to transmit. A green checkmark indicates the file has

been selected.

1. From the Home screen, tap

AllShare).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Tap Settings and configure the following settings as

4. Tap Add to playlist. Your phone then begins to search for

desired:

compatible Wi-Fi devices.

• Media server name allows you to enter the name of the server

transmitting the media files. ex., MyServer. Once you enter the

name tap Save.

5. Tap a destination device from the on-screen list. If you

desired device does not appear, tap Refresh

• Share media allows you to configure which media types will be

shared. Choose from Share video, Share audio, or Share picture.

Receiving Media via AllShare

1. From the Home screen, tap

AllShare).

adjacent to one of the selected transmission

(Applications) ➔

• Access point network allows you to turn on your Wi-Fi

functionality and connect to an available Wi-Fi Access Point.

(

• Upload from other devices allows you to setup an acceptance rule

of incoming media from other external devices. Choose from

Always accept, Always ask, or Always reject and tap OK.

2. Tap

methods. (This procedure assumes selection of the second

option.)

3. Press

to return to the previous page.

3. Tap a source media server from the on-screen list. If you

Transmitting Media via AllShare

1. From the Home screen, tap

server does not appear, tap Refresh

(Applications) ➔

(

AllShare).

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

126

Amazon MP3

Audio Postcard

Amazon MP3 is a digital music store owned and operated by

Amazon.com. Using you can download DRM-Free (digital rights

management) MP3 formatted songs and albums. For more

information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on page 115.

In this menu you can select a frame, take a picture and then

record a voice message up to one minute long and send it as an

Audio Postcard. For more information, refer to “Sending an Audio

Postcard” on page 98.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Amazon MP3).

2. Select an on-screen category (Bestselling Albums

Bestselling Songs Browse By Genre, or Search).

(

Applications) ➔

1. From the Home screen, tap

Audio Postcard).

2. Tap the Left or Right arrow on the screen to select a frame

or background or tap Choose frame

(Applications) ➔

(

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to locate the desired

3. Center the subject in the view finder and press the

track or album.

icon.

4. Tap the song title to listen to an audio preview. Tap the

4. Tap Record and record an audio message.

song title again to stop playback.

5. Tap Send to, select a recipient and tap Send

• Preview allows you to play an audio clip of the selected song.

Calculator

5. Once you have located a desired song title or album, tap

Using this feature you can use the phone as a calculator. The

calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,

subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as

a scientific calculator.

[price]

➔

Buy.

•

Pressing BUY allows you to purchase the song and download it to

your device’s microSD card.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Calculator).

2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.

(Applications) ➔

(

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the

• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,

or Day. Or you can look for events for a future date.

Plus, Minus, Multiplication, or Division key.

2. Press

and select one of the following options:

4. Enter the next number.

• Search: allows you to search within current events.

• Create: creates a new Event.

5. To view the result, tap the

(equals) key.

6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.

• Go to: displays a specific date.

• Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting

Note: Place the screen in Landscape mode (sliding screen open) to reveal

the date.

additional scientific functions.

• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or

an individual event.

Calendar

• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.

With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,

week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a

reminder. Google Calendar is built into the phone and

synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone

and your online Google account.

For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts” on

page 86.

To manually sync calendar events:

1. Press

sync

➔

and then tap

➔

Accounts and

Important!: You must have previously added an account (Facebook, Microsoft

Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the Calendar.

2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to

synchronize.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

3. Tap

within the adjacent account field to reveal the

(

Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:

account’s synchronization settings screen.

• Month: displays the Month view.

• Week: displays the Week view.

• Day: displays the Day view.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

128

4. Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization of

calendar events between your device and the remote

exchange server. A green checkmark indicates the feature

is enabled.

Car Home

Configuresthephone’suserinterfacetobeeasiertousewhileyouare

driving.

Warning!: Please use this application responsibly.

Call logs

1. From the Home screen, tap

Car Home).

2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept

(Applications) ➔

The Call log lists all the calls missed, received, or dialed.

For more information, refer to “Call Logs Tab” on page 63.

Contacts

(

The screen is laid out with the most common on-screen applications

available for quick access.

The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your

Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.

To reset your phone’s interface back to the default layout:

For more information, refer to “Contacts List” on page 76.

ᮣ

From the Car Home screen, tap Exit

Desk Home

Configures the phone’s user interface to mimic a desktop layout.

From the Home screen, tap Applications) ➔

Desk Home).

Camera

Use your 5.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG

format.

ᮣ

(

Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camera will take and store

photos.

(

The screen is laid out with commonly used on-screen applications

available for quick access.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Camera).

(Applications) ➔

(

To reset your phone’s interface back to the default layout:

For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on page 106.

ᮣ

From the Desk Home screen, tap Exit.

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Enable Bluetooth activates Bluetooth and routes all incoming calls

doubletwist

doubletwist Player is the best all-in-one music, radio and video

app. For more information, refer to “doubletwist” on page 117.

to your handsfree device.

• Enable Auto Response enables or disable an automatic SMS text

message response to all incoming text messages notifying users

that you are currently driving and can not answer a text.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

doubletwist).

DriveSmart

(Applications) ➔

(

• Edit Auto Response allows you to edit the default text message

response or create your own. After editing the response tap OK.

3. Press

to return to the previous screen.

The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions from

your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to voicemail and

customizing auto responses to both callers and text message

respondents notifying them that your driving.

Email enables you to review and create email using most email

services. The device alerts you when you receive an email

message.

Warning!: Using your mobile device while driving may divert your attention

from your responsibilities as a driver, result in an accident or other

injury and could be a violation of law.

For more information, refer to “Email” on page 98.

Facebook

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Applications) ➔

This application allows you to both access your Facebook page

and synchronize contacts and posting between your phone and

Fcacebook website. For more information, refer to “Get Friends”

on page 87.

DRIVE

(

DriveSmart).

SMART

2. Tap OK and begin configuring the on-screen application

options:

1. From the Home screen, tap

Facebook).

2. Read the on-screen End-User License Agreement and tap

I agree

(Applications) ➔

• Upgrade to DriveSmart Plus allows you to upgrade the phone’s

standard version to a more robust version of the application.

(

• DriveSmart enables or disables the DriveSmart application.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

130

3. Enter your Email and Password information and tap Login

For more information, refer to “Using Google Mail” on page 104.

Gogo

Files

Gogo, powered by Aircell, turns a commercial airplane into a

Wi-Fi hotspot with true inflight Internet access. Passengers with

Wi-Fi enabled devices, such as smartphones can surf the Web,

check e-mail, instant message, access a corporate VPN and

more.

Organize and store data, images, and more in your own personal

file folders. Files are stored to the memory card in separate (user

defined) folders.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Files).

(Applications) ➔

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

GoGo) application.

(Applications) ➔

For more information, refer to “Files” on page 115.

(

Gallery

2. Follow the on-screen prompts.

The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For

photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a

slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as

a picture message.

Google Search

Google Search is a web-based search engine that uses

text-based queries to search for content on web pages.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Gallery).

(Applications) ➔

(Google Search) and enter the search text.

(

– or –

For more information, refer to “The Gallery” on page 116.

Touch the microphone on the Google Search bar and say

the search information. For more information, refer to

“Search Key” on page 28. F or more information, refer to

“Using Google Search” on page 28.

Google Mail

Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is

configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your

synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize

with your Gmail account on the web.

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HD Camcorder

Kindle

Use your built-in camera lens to activate the HD camcorder (720P)

and record videos that are stored on the microSD card.

Using your 3G connection you can download books through the

Amazon Kindle™ application with no annual contracts, monthly

fees, and no hunting for hotspots.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

HD Camcorder).

(Applications) ➔

(

Important!: You must be registered with Amazon Kindle to use this feature.

Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camera will take and store

1. From the Home screen, tap

Kindle).

2. Enter your registered email address and password and tap

(Applications) ➔

photos.

(

For more information, refer to “Using the HD Camcorder” on

page 114.

INCEPTION

– or –

This movie is preloaded on the SD card included with this device.

1. Confirm the preloaded memory card is in the SD slot. For

more information, refer to “Installing the microSD Memory

Card” on page 9.

Tap Create one now and follow the prompts.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

2. From the Home screen, tap

(Inception).

3. Log into Media Hub (required the first time you tap the

icon). For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on

page 118. The movie plays back within the built-in video

player application.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

132

Latitude

Layar

Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and

status messages with each other. It also lets you send instant

messages and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to

your friends’ locations.

The Layar Reality Browser shows what is around you by

displaying real time digital information on top of the real world as

seen through your mobile phone. This technology is called

Augmented Reality. Layar augments the real world as seen

through your mobile phone, based on your location.

Important!: You must sign in to your Google account, enable Wi-Fi, and

enable the Location feature before you can use this application.

For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on page 171.

How does Layar’s Augmented Reality work?

Layar works by using a combination of the mobile phone’s

camera, compass and GPS data to identify the user’s location

and field of view, retrieve data based on those geographical

coordinates, and overlay that data over the view.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Latitude).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. If desired, tap Allow & Share to share your current location

Important!: You must activate GPS to use this application.

with your Google friends and contacts.

3. Tap Wi-Fi connection to turn on Wi-Fi if it is not already

1. From the Home screen, tap

Layar).

(Applications) ➔

enabled.

(

4. Tap the Your location is hidden field, then tap Detect your

location to enable the Location feature.

2. Read the Layar terms and privacy statement and tap

Accept. Layar initializes your favorites and performs

updates. The displayed tabs provide the following

information:

You are now set up and ready to use Latitude.

5. Press

and then tap an available application option

See map Add friends, or Privacy.

• Nearby: displays Layar locations marked as nearby to your current

location.

such as: Refresh friends

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Layers: displays Layars entries from the following categories:

Enabling a Location source

–

Featured: displays featured Layar locations.

Local: displays local Layar locations.

Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for

places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable

the location source you must enable the wireless network, or

enable the GPS satellites.

Popular: displays the most popular Layar locations.

Categories: search for your own Layar location by categories.

• Search: search for your own Layar location.

Important!: The more location determining functions are enabled, the more

• My: search for your previously store Layar locations.

accurate the determination will be of your position.

• More: provides additional Layar features such as: Account,

Settings, and About Layar.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Maps

Location and security

Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view

real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions.

There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of

interest or a specific address. You can view locations on a vector

or aerial map, or you can view locations at the street level.

2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable GPS to determine

location based on nearby cell towers.

3. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.

4. Tap Use sensor aiding to enhance positioning and save

power using sensors.

Important!: Before using Google Maps you must have an active data (3G) or

connection. The Maps application does not cover every country

or city.

Tip: When using Google Maps you can turn on Enable GPS satellites.

Selecting GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at the

street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses

more battery power.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Maps).

(Applications) ➔

(

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

134

–

More Layers: allows you to add additional layers such as My Maps,

Wikipedia, Transit Lines, Watch the World Cup, and Favorite places.

Opening Maps

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

• My Location: when touched, the location displays on the map with

a blinking blue dot.

(Maps).

2. Locate the top row of the applications to access additional

options:

3. Press

and select one of the following options:

• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.

• Search Maps: allows you to search for a place of interest.

• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a

starting point.

• Places: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly

locate a business or person, find out more information about a

business, see coupons, public responses, and more (page 144).

Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants, Coffee, Bars,

Hotels, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, or Add your own place.)

A list of places within this category displays.

• Starred Places: marks favorite locations on the map. These items

are automatically synchronized with maps.

• Clear Map: after viewing or following directions, this option resets

the map.

• Join Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status

messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages

and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’

locations.

• Layers: allows you to switch map views:

–

Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are

displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how

fast the traffic is moving.

• More

–

Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite

images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery

available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.

–

Labs: a testing ground for experimental features that are not ready to

use publically.

Help: uses the browser to display a searchable Google Mobile Help

screen.

–

Terrain: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain with the

current map location.

Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy

Policy, or Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from

the pop-up menu.

Buzz: allows you post public messages and photos at a location for

everyone to see.

Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your

location with them.

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

–

About: displays general information about Google maps such as

Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free

memory, etc.

Downloading a New Google Application

To download a new application, you will need to use your Google

account to sign in to Android Market. The Android Market home

page provides several ways to find applications. The home page

features applications and includes a list of item applications by

category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My

downloads.

Market

Android Market provides access to downloadable applications

and games to install on your phone. Android Market also allows

you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or

flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Market).

(Applications) ➔

Accessing the Market

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

Market).

(Applications) ➔

2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're

(

interested in, and tap the name.

2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap Next

3. Read the application descriptions.

3. Tap Sign in and enter your Google account information.

Important!: If the selected application requires access to data or control of a

function on your phone, Market displays the information the

application will access.

4. Tap Accept to agree to the Android Market terms of

service.

Touch OK if you agree to the conditions of the application. Once

you touch OK on this screen you are responsible for using this

application on the phone and the amount of data it uses. Use this

feature with caution.

For more information, refer to “Downloading a New Google

Application” on page 136.

4. Tap Install

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

136

Launching an Installed Google Application

1. From the Home screen, tap Applications).

Note: Use caution with applications which request access to any personal

data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage times.

(

2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is

5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for

typically located on the last Applications page.

the application.

Android Development

6. Check the progress of the current download by opening

This device can be used for Android application development.

You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this

device, then run the applications using the hardware, system,

and network.

the Notifications panel.

7. After the item is downloaded and installed on your phone,

the content download icon

appears in the

notification area of the status bar.

Warning!: Android Dev Phone 1 devices are not intended for non-developer

end-users. Because the device can be configured with system

software not provided by or supported by Google or any other

company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.

8. On the Android Market screen, tap Downloads, tap the

installed application in the list, and then tap Open

Unknown sources

Tip: The newly downloaded application displays on the Home screen or other

selected panel.

This feature can be used for Android application development.

The feature allows developers to install non-Market applications.

Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

contact your service provider for further details.

Applications

➔

Unknown sources.

Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is

active.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manage applications

Media Hub

This feature allows you to manage and remove installed

applications. You can also view the amount of memory or

resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources

for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data,

cache, or defaults.

Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and TV

content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch

from the convenience of anywhere.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Media Hub).

(Applications) ➔

(

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 118.

Memo

Applications

➔

Manage application.

Clearing application cache and data

This feature allows you to create a memo.

1. Press

Applications

2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.

3. Tap Clear cache Clear defaults Force stop Permissions or

Show all

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. From the Home screen, tap

Memo).

2. Compose the memo and touch Save

(Applications) ➔

➔

Manage applications

(

For more information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 68.

Memo options

Uninstalling third-party applications

1. While viewing the list of Memos, press

one of the following options:

and select

You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed

from Android Market.

• Create: allows you to create a memo.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

• Maximize: remove the bent, lower-right corner of the memo page

and to maximize the information display.

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

2. Tap the third-party application, and from the Application

info screen, tap Uninstall

• Delete: allows you to delete one or more memos.

• Search: allows you to search within the current set of memos.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

138

2. Touch and hold the memo then select Send via and choose

the method to send this memo: Bluetooth Email, or

Messaging

Mini Diary

This application allows you to create a mini diary where you can

add a photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable

life event.

3. From the memo list, touch the upper-left edit button and

1. From the Home screen, tap

Mini Diary). Any diary entries display in a list.

2. Tap Tap to add text

(Applications) ➔

select a color for the memo’s background, then touch

(

Save

Messaging

3. Tap Tap to add photo field to add a photo for this diary

This application allows you to use the Short Message Service

(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from other

mobile phones.

event and touch the source. Selections are: Camera, or

Images

You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create

multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile

phones.

4. Tap the screen and enter text then tap Save

5. Tap the No weather data icon in the upper, left corner (over

the photo) and select a weather condition from the list to

describe the weather conditions for this entry.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Messaging).

(Applications) ➔

(

6. Tap Save

For more information, refer to “Messages” on page 92.

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mini Diary settings

1. From the Home screen, tap

• Send via MMS: attaches this entry and sends it as a multimedia

message.

(Applications) ➔

• Change photo: replaces the photo in this entry by allowing you to

take another photo or use another image.

(

Mini Diary).

2. From the main Diary listings page, press

➔

Settings.

• Delete photo: deletes the photo from this entry when you touch Yes

to confirm.

3. Tap Selected city and tap the city for which you are

Music Player

documenting this entry.

Music Player allows you to play music files that you have stored

on your microSD card. You can also create playlists.

4. Tap Auto update if you want the settings to automatically

update.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Music Player).

(Applications) ➔

Deleting a Mini Diary entry

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Applications) ➔

For more information, refer to “Music Player” on page 120.

2. Press Delete all

➔

My Account

Mini Diary options

1. From the Home screen, tap

This option provides you with account specific information such

as your current activity, billing information, Plan Services

information. You can also set alerts for minute or message usage,

payment reminder, or power saver.

Applications) ➔

2. Select a diary.

3. Press

• Create: creates a new diary entry.

• Delete: deletes the displayed entry.

and select one of the following options:

Note: You may be prompted to log into the Android Market to receive the

latest version of the T-Mobile My Account application.

• Publish: charges may apply when publishing (exporting). Touch Yes

then select Facebook or MySpace.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

140

–

Over Limit Alert: sends an alert when usage exceeds your plan’s total

available minutes.

The differences between My Account and My Device are these:

• My Account: check usage, pay your T-Mobile bill.

• Message Usage: tracks the number of messages used and

remaining in your plan. If you plan includes unlimited messages this

setting does not apply.

• MyDevice: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage

& Battery.

• Payment Reminder: alerts when your bill is due.

Tip: Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device.

• Power Saver: sends an alert when the battery level reaches 30

percent efficiency. The alert displays in the notification window. This

alert is automatically set to On.

1. From the Home screen, tap

My Account).

2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK

(Applications) ➔

(

Billing

This provides a billing summary.

The initial screen displays four tabs: Activity, Alerts, Billing, and

Plans Services.

Plan Services

This screen displays specific information and charges for your

current plan and services. The screen also displays additional

services information and charges.

Activity

The Activity tab displays your current minute and message

activity. You can view what percentage of minutes were used as

well as the number of messages used for a particular start date.

My Device

Use the My Device application to configure device settings, view

support information, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or

Wallpapers, or view battery storage information.

Set Alerts

From this screen you can activate alerts to notify you of the

following:

1. From the Home screen, tap

My Device).

2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK.

(Applications) ➔

• Minute Usage: tracks the number of minutes used and remaining

in your plan.

(

–

Minute Usage Reminder: sends an alert when the number of minutes

used reaches 75 percent of the total available minutes in the plan.

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Support

Tip: Use the Menu key (

) to toggle between My Account and My Device.

Displays support information My Account Feedback, T-Mobile

Forums, and T-Mobile on Twitter.

The differences between My Account and My Device are these:

• My Account: check usage, pay your T-Mobile bill.

Storage Battery

• My Device: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage

& Battery.

From this tab you can view Memory storage information for the

phone or memory card. You can also view the battery level

percentage and other information.

The initial screen displays four tabs: Personalize, Quick Tools,

Support, and Storage Battery.

Navigation

Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected

turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.

Personalize My Device

Using this menu you can personalize CallerTunes, Ringtone, and

Wallpapers.

• CallerTunes: personalize caller tunes.

Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,

dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.

• Ringtones: you can personalize your phone’s ringtones when you

Download HiFi Ringers, view Ringtone Subscriptions, access Voice

Sounds, and access Phone Ringtones.

Important!: To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the

following conditions:

• Wallpapers: you can personalize your phone’s background by

selecting wallpapers from the Gallery, Live Wallpaper, the Wallpaper

Gallery, or the T-Mobile Gallery.

- inside a building or between buildings

- in a tunnel or underground passage

- in poor weather

- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields

- in a vehicle with tinted windows

Quick Tools

Quick Tools is a shortcut that allows you to activate Wi-Fi,

activate and configure Data Roaming features, activate and

configure GPS features, set the screen timeout for the display,

and view phone information.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Navigation).

(Applications) ➔

(

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

142

Enabling GPS Location

• Contacts: allows you to receive turn-by-turn directions to the

address stored for a selected Contacts entry.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

• Starred Places: allows you to obtain directions to locations that

have been starred within Google maps (maps.google.com).

Location and security

2. Tap Use GPS satellites. A green check mark indicates the

Navigation Map options

GPS location feature is enabled.

Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:

•

Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options screen.

Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing

(English only).

Navigation options

1. From the Home screen, tap

➔

(Navigation).

The navigation application can be configured from the

main screen.

•

Layers: allows you to switch map views:

• Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic

conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color

represents how fast the traffic is moving.

2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept

3. Choose from the following on-screen options:

• Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth.

Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best

imagery available, most of which is approximately one to three

years old.

• Driving/Walking: configures the method of travel. Selection of

Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and

obstructions.

–

Driving mode enables the Settings feature: allows you to configure

your Route options such as: Avoid highways or Avoid tolls

• Maps: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.

• Parking: displays parking information relative to your current

location.

• Gas Stations: displays gas station location relative to your current

location.

• Speak Destination: allows you to use the voice recognition feature

to search for matching locations in your area.

• ATMs & Banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your

current location.

• Type Destination: allows you to manually enter a destination

address (via the on-screen keypad).

• Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to

your current location.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Search in plain English: manually search for a destination address,

place, name of business, or even a type of business.

Set Destination: returns you to the navigation options screen where

you can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting

from a Contacts entry or Starred Place.

Places

Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google

Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business

or person, find out more information about the business, see

coupons, public responses, and more.

•

Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous description.

Mute: allows you to mute the audio readout and directional

information.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Places).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Use the Find places field to manually enter a desired place

or choose from among the various categories. Matches are

filtered by those closest to your current location.

•

Exit Navigation: terminates the application.

More: provides additional application information such as: Help and

Term, Privacy & Notices.

3. Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,

Coffee, Bars, Hotels, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, or

Add your own place.) A list of places within this category

displays.

Caution!: Navigation is a beta product. Use caution.

News and Weather

1. From the Home screen, tap

News and Weather).

2. Select from any of the available tabs: Weather

U.S., Sports, and Entertainment

To access the settings:

1. Press and then tap Settings

2. Tap an available option: Weather settings

Refresh settings, and Application version

(Applications) ➔

(

4. Touch the Maps icon (upper-right) to launch the related

Top Stories,

maps feature.

5. Press

and then tap Latitude. The functions of this

application are similar to those of the Navigation

application, but work along with the Latitude service

where you can share your location with your chosen

Google friends.

News settings,

Applications and Development

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Begin selecting the music you want to listen to.

Settings

This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your

phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory,

and any extra settings associated with your phone.

Swype tips

Using the SwypeTips application you can watch a video or start a

tutorial that teaches you how to use Swype most efficiently.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Swype Tips).

(Applications) ➔

(Settings).

(

– or –

Press

For more information, refer to “Swype Text Entry Tips” on

page 70.

➔

and then tap

(Settings).

T-Mobile TV

T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and

Video on Demand.

For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on

page 171.

Slacker

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

T-Mobile TV).

(Applications) ➔

Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile phones.

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

Slacker).

(Applications) ➔

(

For more information, refer to “T-Mobile TV” on page 123.

Talk

Important!: You must register and create a free account prior to using this

service.

You can instant message with Google Talk. Google Talk allows

you to communicate with other people who are also connected

with Google Talk on the phone or on the web.

2. Enter your Email address and password.

– or –

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Google Talk).

For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 105.

(Applications) ➔

Tap Create Account if you have not created an account.

(

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Summary displays a visual graph indicating the available and used

space within the internal Program storage location and External

SD card.

Task Manager

Sometimes your phone might seem to slow down over time, and the

biggest reason for this are background applications. These are

applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still

active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which

of these applications are still active in the background butalso easily

lets you choose which applications are left running and which are

closed.

• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.

4. From the Active applications tab, tap End to close selected

applications or tap End all to close all background running

applications.

TeleNav GPS

TeleNav GPS Navigator is a driving aid that uses both audible and

visual directions for GPS navigation.

Shutting Down Applications

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Task Manager).

(Applications) ➔

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

TeleNav GPS).

(Applications) ➔

– or –

Press and hold

(

then tap Task Manager. This screen

2. A Warning message displays. Read the agreement and tap

Accept to accept the terms, or tap EXIT to close the

window.

contains the following tabs:

• Active applications display those currently active applications

running on your phone.

3. Select to either Upgrade the application or use the Basic

• Package displays any installed packages or applications from the

Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove

them from your phone.

Navigation service at no charge.

4. Enter the required information for TeleNav.

• RAM manager, displays the amount of current RAM (Random

Access Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear

Memory for either Level 1 or Level 2 (both Level memory

locations).

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

146

ThinkFree Office

Qik Video Chat

ThinkFree Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office

compatible office suite. This application provides a central place

for managing your documents online or offline.

This is a mobile video sharing and 2-way video calling service.

This application also lets you record and share experiences with

your friends, family, and your favorite social networks.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Video Chat) ➔ Sign up

(Applications) ➔

The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document

Format) files.

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

ThinkFree).

(Applications) ➔

2. Fill in the Email address,

Username, and

(

2. Read the End User License Agreement, then tap Accept if

Password, then tap Sign

up to create your new

account.

you agree with the terms of use.

3. On its initial launch, tap Activate now.Three tabs display:

• Home: displays the introduction to ThinkFree Office and lists a short

description of each of the tabs and what type of information they

provide.

3. Follow the on-screen

instructions. For more

information, visit: http://

• My Docs: This is where you keep your documents on this device.

You can manage documents, or send them to others, and upload

the documents to ThinkFree Online.

qik.com/

• Online: This provides your thinkfree.com online storage

information. You can also share your documents to others without

using email attachments.

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To adjust application settings:

1. Press and then tap Settings

Recording Qik Video

1. From the Home screen,

tap

(

Applications

)

2. Choose from any of the following options:

➔

(Video Chat) ➔

• Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences.

–

Facebook: set up your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos.

Twitter: set up your Twitter account sharing preferences.

YouTube: set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos.

People: set up your contact sharing parameters.

Record & Share

2. Read the one-time

disclaimer describing the

public nature of your

• Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is

embedded into your Qik videos. When posting or sharing Qik video

information with others, you can decide how accurate the related

location information can be. Choose from: Off

level, or Track live

videos and tap OK

3. Tap Record to start

recording.

City level, Street

• Video encoding quality allows you to assign a video quality to the

outbound video. Choose from: Low Normal, or High

– or –

Tap Stop to end the recording process.

• About displays the version information for the Qik Video Chat

application.

4. Enter a title for your video segment and select those

services you wish to use to distribute your video.

•

Services such as Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, SMS, and E-mail ask

that you select a recipient for your video segment.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

148

Video Player

Voice Dialer

The Video Player application plays video files stored on your

microSD card.

Voice dialer is a voice recognition software used to activate a

wide variety of functions on your phone.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Video Player).

(

Applications) ➔

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Voice Dialer).

(Applications) ➔

(

For more information, refer to “Using the Video Player” on

For more information, refer to “Using the Voice Dialer” on

page 117.

page 54.

Visual Voicemail

Voice Recorder

Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a

voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want

without being limited to chronological order.

The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one

minute long and then immediately send it as a message.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Voice Recorder).

(Applications) ➔

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Visual Voicemail).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Tap the Record icon to record an audio file.

For more information, refer to “Visual Voicemail” on page 17.

3. Tap Stop to stop recording. The file automatically saves to

the Voice list.

4. Press

and then tap Share and select a method in

which to share this audio file. Selections are: Bluetooth,

Messaging, Email, or Gmail. Refer to each specific section,

depending on the method you selected to send this voice

recording.

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Voice Search

Web

The Voice Search feature is a voice-activated application that

allows you to tell the phone what to search for and then the

phone activates a Google search based on what you said.

Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully

optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the

Internet browsing feature on your phone.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Web).

(Applications) ➔

For more information, refer to “Using Additional Voice Search

Functions” on page 29.

(

1. From the Home screen, tap

Voice Search).

(Applications) ➔

For more information, refer to “Web” on page 152.

(

Wi-Fi Calling

This feature allows you to make calls using a Wi-Fi over the

T-Mobile network.

2. Select Agree if you want Google to use location for

improved search results and other services, or Disagree to

decline.

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Wi-Fi Calling).

(Applications) ➔

(

3. At the Speak now screen speak your search command

slowly and clearly.

For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Calling” on page 57.

Google searches for the information and displays related

information in the browser.

Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi

Calling feature will automatically be enabled.

Applications and Development

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

150

To watch a high quality video:

While playing a video, press

High quality on mobile

Write and Go

ᮣ

➔

Settings

➔

Use write and go to job down an idea, then decide what format

you want to use to save, send, or post it. You can send as a

message, send to your Gmail account, Update to Facebook, save

it in the Calendar or as a memo.

1. From the Home screen, tap

Write and go).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. Compose the text then select one of the following:

• Send: sends as a Message or sends to your Gmail (or other email)

account.

• Update status: posts this text to your Facebook, MySpace, or

Twitter account.

• Save: saves the text to the calendar or as a memo.

YouTube

YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload

and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.

1. From the Home screen, tap

YouTube).

(Applications) ➔

(

2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and

viewing posted videos.

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 10: Connections

Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly

connect to the web.

•

Yahoo Mail: displays the Sign in for Yahoo Mail. Register by sending a

text message with the word START to 92500 if you are not already

registered.

Web

•

Facebook: displays the Facebook Log in. Sign up from this page if you

are not already registered.

Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the

mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the browser

and use the basic features.

AccuWeather: based on your location settings, AccuWeather displays

the current weather conditions.

Accessing the Internet

•

CNN: displays current news headlines and more.

ESPN: displays current sports news headlines and more.

What’s Now: provides quick access to a variety of different

entertainment and shopping websites.

To access the Browser:

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Web).

(Applications) ➔

(

•

My Account: provides quick access to your My Account page.

More Sites: displays different on-screen pages containing

shortcuts to a variety of different applications (Email/IM,

Social/Chat, etc..) and categories (Sports, Weather,

En Español, My Account).

Homepage

When you access the Browser, the web2go home page displays

the following topics:

•

Google Search: allows you to quickly search for online topics using

the Google search engine.

Navigating with the Browser

Advertisement: provides an on-screen advertisement bubble

providing suggested phone applications.

1. To select an item, touch an entry.

2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your

Downloads: allows you to download Ringtone, Callertunes, Games,

Apps, or Gift and Deals.

finger in an up or down motion.

3. To return to the previous page, touch

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connections

152

–

Downloads: displays the download history.

Browser Options

1. From the home page, press

options:

Settings: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by

changing these options. See “Browser Settings” on page 156.

to access the following

Entering a URL

• New window: displays a new window so you can browse multiple

URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and Deleting

Windows” on page 154.

You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites

are optimized for viewing on your phone.

• Windows: displays a list of the windows you have open.

To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these steps:

• Brightness setting: allows you to manually adjust the screen

brightness.

ᮣ

Touch the URL field at the top of the screen, enter the URL

and touch Go

Note: If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled (Settings

➔

Display

➔

Search the Internet

Brightness), you can not modify the browser’s brightness setting.

To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these

steps:

• Refresh: reloads the current page.

• Forward: forwards the browser to another web page.

• More: displays the following additional options:

1. Touch the Google search field, enter the keyword(s) to

search using the on-screen keypad and touch

–

Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.

(

Search). A list of search results displays.

Add shortcut to Home: adds a shortcut to your web2go homepage on

your phone’s Home screen.

2. Touch a link to view the website.

–

Add RSS feeds: adds RSS feeds to your browser.

Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.

Page info: displays information about the selected page.

Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a

message.

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding and Deleting Windows

Using Bookmarks

You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time. To

add a new window, follow these steps:

While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly

and easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website

addresses) of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks

page. From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most

visited websites and view your History.

1. From your browser, press

and then tap New Window.

– or –

Press

and then tap Windows

➔

(New

1. From the Home webpage, tap

displays. Additional pages include Most visited and History

2. Press to display the following options:

. The Bookmarks page

Window).

2. A new browser window displays.

3. Press

windows.

and then tap Windows to see a list of all open

• Bookmark last-viewed page: Creates a new bookmark for the

last webpage that you viewed.

• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view a

thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List view

to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.

Note: This icon will display a number that corresponds to the current number

of active browser windows,

• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new

4. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active

windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet

window.

bookmarks.

3. Touch a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold

a bookmark for the following options:

• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.

5. Tap

next to the listing to delete the window.

• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.

• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the

bookmark. For more information, refer to “Editing Bookmarks”

on page 155.

Connections

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Add shortcut to Home: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked

3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the

webpage to your phone’s Home screen.

bookmark or the URL.

• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth,

Facebook, Email, Gmail, or Messaging.

4. Tap OK

• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a

Deleting Bookmarks

1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark

you want to delete.

message.

• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more

information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 155.

2. Tap Delete bookmark

• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.

Adding Bookmarks

3. At the confirmation window, tap OK

1. From the Home webpage, tap

➔

Add.

Emptying the Cookies

2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the

A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during

navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific

information, a cookie can also contain some personal information

(such as a username and password) which might pose a security

risk if not properly managed. You can clear these cookies from

your phone at any time.

bookmark and the URL.

3. Assign a folder location. Home is the default.

4. Tap OK. The new save page now appears on the

Bookmarks page.

1. From the Home webpage, press

More Settings Clear all cookie data

2. Tap Yes to delete the cookies or touch Cancel to exit.

and then tap

Editing Bookmarks

1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark

you want to edit.

➔

2. Tap Edit bookmark

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Web History

Browser Settings

The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed

websites. These entries can be used to return to previously

unmarked web pages.

To make configure browser settings, follow these steps:

1. From the Home screen, tap

Web).

and then tap More

(Applications) ➔

(

1. From the Home webpage, tap

➔

History tab.

2. Press

➔

Settings.

A list of the most recently viewed websites displays.

3. Choose from the following on-screen options:

2. Tap an entry to display the webpage.

• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or

Close.

– or –

• Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of recently viewed

Press

and then tap Clear history to delete the current

web pages.

History list.

• Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.

Using Most Visited

• Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup advertisement or

windows from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to

disable this function.

The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited

and bookmarked websites. These entries are used to return to

previously unmarked web pages.

• Loadimages: Allows web page images to load along with the other

text components of a loaded website.

1. From the Home webpage, tap

➔

Most visited tab.

• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of

the screen as possible.

A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays.

The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of

the list.

• Landscape view only: Displays the browser in only the horizontal

position.

• Enable JavaScript: Enables javascript for the current Web page.

Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove

the checkmark to disable this function.

2. Tap any entry to display the selected webpage.

Connections

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe

Flash.

• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for

visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.

• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page

and displayed behind the current one. Remove the checkmark to

disable this function.

• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or

passwords. Tap Yes to complete the process.

• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue

with the current website. Remove the checkmark to disable this

function.

• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser.

• Default storage: Sets the default storage to Phone or

Memory card.

• Set search engine: Allows you to choose a default search engine

for your phone. Choose from: Google Yahoo!, or Bing.

• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap Yes to

complete the process.

• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites.

• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap Yes to

complete the process.

• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to

default.

• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and

Bluetooth

About Bluetooth

read cookies from your device.

• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.

Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that

allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth

devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and

Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless

devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to

approximately 30 feet.

• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any

previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this

function.

• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out

forms. Tap Yes to complete the process.

• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your

location.

• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap

Yes to complete the process.

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

Bluetooth Settings

To turn Bluetooth on:

The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the

characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

•

Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth

communication and description

➔

Bluetooth settings

Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth

devices

indicates active). When active,

Status area.

displays in the

Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address

To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:

1. Press and then tap

Wireless and network Bluetooth settings

To turn Bluetooth off:

1. Press

Wireless and network

➔

(Settings) ➔

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Bluetooth settings

2. Verify Bluetooth is active. Indicated by a green check mark

2. Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature.

in the Bluetooth field.

Bluetooth Status Indicators

3. Tap the Device name

Visible, and Scan devices fields to set

The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status

at a glance:

the options.

Displays when Bluetooth is active.

To change your Bluetooth name:

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and

communicating.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name

3. Enter a new name.

4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.

Connections

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To set visibility:

Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once

pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible

To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:

Making your device visible allows other devices to pair and

communicate.

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible

Note: Your device is visible for up to 120 seconds (2 minutes). This value

Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an

external device.

appears as a countdown within this field.

To scan for Bluetooth devices:

3. Tap Scan devices. Your device displays a list of discovered

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

in-range Bluetooth devices.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan devices to

search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices

such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.

4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.

5. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK

6. The external device must accept the connection and enter

Pairing Bluetooth Devices

your device’s PIN code.

The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted

connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.

When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,

secure connections while bypassing the discovery and

authentication process.

Once successfully paired to an external device,

displays in the Status area.

Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-

compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and

functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all

Bluetooth-compatible devices.

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the

name of the previously paired device (from the bottom of

the page). This opens the connected device’s menu

options.

Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between

the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the

pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device,

there is no need to setup the connection information again.

3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

Sending Contacts via Bluetooth

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch the previously

Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you

may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items

using a Bluetooth connection.

paired device (from the bottom of the page).

3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.

– or –

Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your

phone and the external device, and the recipient’s device must be

visible.

From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the

name of the previously paired device, and select

Only a Contact’s information can be sent via Bluetooth. No other file

type (video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.

Disconnect

Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.

paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off.

2. From the Home screen, tap

(Contacts).

Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device

3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on-

Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record”

and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the

previous pairing information.

screen context menu.

4. Tap Send namecard via

➔

Bluetooth and select a paired

external Bluetooth device.

1. Verify Bluetooth is active.

Connections

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PC Connections

Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for

the pairing to be successful.

You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data

cable using various USB connection modes. When you connect

the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with Windows

Media Player, and transfer data to and from your device directly.

5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications

list.

What is Kies Mini?

Enable Downloading for Web Applications

Samsung Kies Mini is a software that enables you to update your

device firmware by connecting to the PC.

Important!: Before you can download a web application you must insert an

SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature

(enables downloading). For more information, refer to “Installing

the microSD Memory Card” on page 9. Also, see “Mounting the

SD Card” on page 49.

To learn more about Samsung Kies Mini and Samsung

applications:

1. Browse samsung Support site and locate your phone:

1. Press

Applications

2. Tap the Unknown sources check box.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads

2. Navigate to the Software tab and download Kies Mini.

Important!: If you need any additional USB drivers, these can also be found

3. Tap Yes to allow install of non-Market applications.

Tap again to remove the checkmark and disable the

installation of non-market applications.

within the phone’s Download Center

Software tab.

Connecting with Kies Mini

1. Install Samsung Kies Mini software on your PC.

2. Press and then tap Settings) ➔

Applications USB settings Kies (Firmware update).

Warning!: Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to protect

your phone and data, use Android Market to install web

applications. For more information, refer to “Downloading a New

Google Application” on page 136.

➔

(

➔

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction

Connecting as a Mass Storage Device

jack on your device to a PC.

You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and

access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the

device, you can also access the files directory from the memory

card by using the device as a memory card reader.

4. Run Samsung Kies and follow the prompts to update your

device firmware.

5. Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information.

Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk,

Synchronizing with Windows Media Player

separate from the internal memory.

Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC.

1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files from

1. Press

Applications

2. Press the Home key to return to Idle mode.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

or to the memory card.

➔

USB settings Media player.

➔

Note: To use any downloaded market application that requires a USB

connection between your phone and your PC, you should first set the

3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction

jack on your device to a PC with Windows Media Player

installed.

USB setting to Mass storage

2. Press

Applications

3. Press to return to Idle mode.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

USB settings Mass storage.

➔

A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.

4. Open Windows Media Player to synchronize music files.

4. Connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC

using an optional PC data cable.

5. Edit or enter your device’s name in the pop-up window.

6. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync list

A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.

and begin synchronizing.

5. Open the folder to view files.

6. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.

Connections

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

Wi-Fi

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

About Wi-Fi

Wireless and network

➔

Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain

types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi

communication requires access to an existing and accessible

Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open

(unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring

knowledge of the Router name and password).

The network names and security settings (Open network or

Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in

the Wi-Fi networks section.

2. Tap the network you wish to connect to.

Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi

Calling feature will automatically be enabled. For more information,

refer to “Wi-Fi Calling” on page 57.

Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.

3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary).

Activating Wi-Fi

By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).

Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to

compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

2. Tap Wi-Fi to activate the feature. A checkmark indicates

that Wi-Fi is active. The device scans for available in-range

wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks

on the same screen.

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manually Add a New Network Connection

1. Tap Add Wi-Fi network

Deactivating Wi-Fi

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access

Point).

2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to deactivate the feature. The

checkmark grays.

3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This

must match the current security setting on your target

WAP.

Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can

reduce battery life and use times.

4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.

Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network

5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Press and then tap Scan

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

target WAP.

➔

Wi-Fi settings

Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to

connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network. The

WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default

settings.

Wi-Fi Status Indicators

The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:

Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and

communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).

Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a

communication issue with the target Wireless Access

Point (WAP).

Connections

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Wi-Fi Advanced Settings

To activate the Mobile AP service:

1. Press and then tap

Wireless and network Mobile AP

➔

(Settings) ➔

The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of

the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:

➔

•

Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy

2. Tap Mobile AP and place a checkmark in the adjacent field

Viewing the device’s MAC Address

Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP

to activate the service.

3. Tap OK to continue with the activation.

To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:

1. Press and then tap

Wireless and network Wi-Fi settings

and then tap Advanced

4. Write down the Network SSID name. This name is

➔

(Settings) ➔

generally AndroidAPXXXX

➔

5. Confirm the Mobile AP service icon

appears at the

2. Press

top of the screen.

Mobile AP

This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Wi-Fi hotspot.

The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA+

(4G) data services (although 3G service can also be used).

Note: By default, the connection is open and not secured. It is recommended

that you access the Mobile AP settings and create a secure connection

by using a password for communication.

Important!: The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as

Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi connection prior to launching the

Mobile AP service.

Note: Using your 4G service and Mobile AP Hotspot drains your phone’s

battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature

combination.

The best way to keep using the phone as a hotspot is to have it

connected to a power supply.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To connect to the Hotspot:

Important!: The more complex the password, the harder it will be for

intruders to break your security. It is recommended that you not

use names, birthdays, or

1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target device

(laptop, media device, etc.).

4. Tap the Hide my device field to keep your phone from

2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select your

transmitting its Network SSID name.

phone hotspot from the network list.

•

The default name for your phone’s hotspot is AndroidAPXXXX.

You can change the name by tapping Mobile AP settings

➔

Network SSID and changing the entry.

3. Select this Hotspot and follow your on-screen instructions

to complete the connection.

4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet

connection.

To secure the Mobile AP service:

The two most common methods for securing your connection to

the Hotspot are to a security method (WPA2 PSK) and to Hide

your phone’s SSID name.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

➔

Mobile AP

➔

Mobile AP settings.

3. With security enabled, enter a new password into the

Password field.

Connections

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 11: Time Management

This section describes how you can manage time using time-

related applications such as the Calendar, Alarm Clock, Analog or

Digital clock, and the World clock.

• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or

an individual event.

• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.

Creating a Calendar Event

Calendar

1. From the Home screen, tap

Calendar).

(Applications) ➔

With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,

week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a

reminder.

(

2. From the Month tab, press

➔

Create.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

Calendar Settings

(Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:

Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which

you want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to

view the calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to

manage events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.

• Month: displays the Month view.

• Week: displays the Week view.

• Day: displays the Day view.

• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,

or Day. Or you can look for events for a future date.

1. From the Home screen, tap

2. Press Settings

(

Applications) ➔

➔

2. Press

and select one of the following options:

3. Tap Calendars and select the calendar categories you want

to display or touch All calendars. A check mark indicates

selection.

• Search: allows you to search within your current events.

• Create: creates a new Event.

• Go to: displays a specific date.

• Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting

the date.

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Tap Calendar sync and select the type of general

synchronization settings you want. A check mark indicates

selection.

Alarm and Clocks

This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring at a specified

time, track time in other parts of the world, use a stopwatch, or

set a timer.

5. Tap Default view and select a view: Month

List

6. Tap Day view and select a type: Time grid, or Event list

7. Tap First day of week and select either Sunday or Monday

Week, Day, or

ᮣ

From the Home screen, tap

Alarm & Clocks).

(

Applications) ➔

(

Setting an Alarm

1. From the Home screen, tap

(

Applications) ➔

8. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check

(

Alarm & Clocks).

Create alarm).

mark indicates selection.

2. Tap

(

9. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your

current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from

within the Select time zone field.

3. Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour, and

minutes, then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on which

was last selected).

10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event notification

4. Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times

method. Choose from: Alert

Off

11. Tap Vibrate to activate this notification option. Selections

are: Always Only in Silent mode, or Never

Status bar notification, and

you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: One-time

event Daily, Every weekday(Mon-Fri), or Weekly. If you

selected Weekly, a button row displays. Tap each day of

the week in which you want this alarm to repeat, then tap

12. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event

Save

notification.

5. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm.

Time Management

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Tap the radio button to activate a tone for one of the

following alarm types: Snooze or Smart alarm

7. Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:

Melody Vibration Vibration and melody, or Voice

To assign DST settings:

1. Locate a desired city from the World Clock list.

2. Touch and hold a city and select DST settings

3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, 1 hour or 2 hours).

8. Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following:

Sounds, or Go to My files. Locate a sound to use as an

alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone.

Stopwatch

This feature allows you to use a stopwatch to time multiple laps.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

9. Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to

decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the

volume level plays.

(

Alarm & Clocks) ➔ Stop watch tab.

2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter.

3. Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter.

4. Tap Stop to stop the counter.

World Clock

This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of

world.

5. Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have

multiple lap times.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

6. Tap Reset to reset the counter.

2. Tap the World Clock tab.

3. Tap

(Add city) then scroll and select the desired city,

or tap in the search field to locate a city.

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting a Timer

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications) ➔

(

Alarm & Clocks) ➔ Timer tab.

2. Tap the hr min, or sec field and use the on-screen keypad

to enter the hour, minute, or seconds.

3. Tap Start to start the timer.

4. Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and

start over.

5. Tap Restart to resume the timer counter.

Time Management

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

170

Section 12: Changing Your Settings

Thissectionexplainsthesoundandphonesettingsforyourphone.

It includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any

extra settings associated with your phone.

Activating Wi-Fi

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings.

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

Wireless and Networks

Using Flight mode

2. Tap Wi-Fi. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi is

active.

Flight mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features,

such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane

or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is

prohibited.

Wi-Fi settings

Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your phone automatically uses

Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile phone services.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Configure the settings as desired.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Important!: When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive

➔

Wi-Fi settings

any calls or access online information or applications.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

The available connection types displayed with a security type

displayed next to them.

Wireless and network

2. Tap Flight mode. A check mark displayed next to the

feature indicates Flight mode is active.

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Network Notification

WPS allows you to push buttons instead of entering a network

name and wireless security PIN.

By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the

Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi

network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to

receive notifications.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap WPS button connection

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Wi-Fi settings

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

3. Press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi access point within 2

Wireless and network

➔

minutes.

2. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to

Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network

the feature indicates Network notification is active.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Wi-Fi settings

(Settings) ➔

3. Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark

Wireless and network

➔

and deactivate this feature.

2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on.

WPS Button Connection

3. Tap Add Wi-Fi network

The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button is a standard for easy

and secure wireless network set up and connections. To use

WPS, the connecting device must support WPS and be

compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. WPS can

automatically set up a random network name and WPA wireless

security for wireless Wi-Fi phones, routers, access points,

computers, adapters, and other electronic devices.

4. Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) and Security settings

then tap Save

Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its purpose is

to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN — whether

accidentally or intentionally. To communicate, wireless devices must

be configured with the same SSID.

Mobile AP

For more information, refer to “Mobile AP” on page 165.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

172

Bluetooth settings

Activating Visibility

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device

name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can

discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with

which to pair.

Wireless and network

➔

Bluetooth settings

➔

Visible.

The phone is now activated for discovery for 119 seconds

so you can pair with another device. After 119 seconds the

phone becomes undiscoverable again.

Activating Bluetooth

ᮣ

Press

Wireless and network

Bluetooth to turn it on.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Scanning for Devices

➔

Bluetooth settings and tap

This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you

can pair with them.

1. Press

Wireless and network

Scan devices

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.

➔

Bluetooth settings

➔

Activating the Device Name

1. Activate Bluetooth.

Your phone begins scanning and lists any discovered

devices in the Bluetooth devices section.

2. Press

Wireless and network

The assigned device name displays.

3. Press to erase the current device name and enter a

new name for this device using the keyboard.

4. Tap OK to confirm your setting.

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

➔

Bluetooth settings

➔

Device name.

2. Tap a device name to pair with the device.

Important!: Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to

confirm and pair with them.

3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and

tap OK

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tethering

To disconnect tethering:

1. Press

Wireless and network

➔

and then tap

Tethering

(Settings) ➔

This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data

connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and

computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be

the Mobile AP feature.

➔

2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the

check mark and deactivate the feature.

Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while

using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers

are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/

downloads.

3. Remove the USB cable from the phone.

VPN settings

The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual

Private Networks (VPNs).

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Tethering

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

Important!: Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one.

2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your

phone.

Adding a VPN

3. When prompted for a USB mode, press

to exit the

Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to

use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2

Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based

L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).

menu.

4. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places a

green check mark next to the entry and activates the

feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active notification briefly

appears on the screen.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap Add VPN

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

VPN settings

Look for the Tethering active icon

area of the screen.

in the Status bar

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

174

To establish a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol):

To establish a L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec):

1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).

2. Set the VPN server.

3. Enable L2TP secret.

4. Set L2TP secret.

3. Enable encryption (if desired).

4. Set the DNS search domains.

5. Set user certificate. Note: A user certificate must be

To establish a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol):

installed to use this setting.

1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).

6. Set CA certificate. Note: A CA certificate must be installed

2. Set the VPN server.

3. Enable L2TP secret.

4. Set L2TP secret.

to use this setting.

7. Set the DNS search domains.

Mobile networks

5. Set the DNS search domains.

Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your

location or search for places of interest, you must enable the

Mobile networks options.

To establish a L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based L2TP/IPSec):

1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).

2. Set the VPN server.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

3. Set IPSEc pre-shared key.

4. Enable L2TP secret.

5. Set L2TP secret.

Wireless and network

➔

Mobile networks.

6. Set the DNS search domains.

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following options display:

Network mode

Use packet data

You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use

either a 2G (GSM) or 3G (WCDMA) data network connection.

Allows you to activate data usage on your phone.

ᮣ

Press

Wireless and network

mode

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

ᮣ

Press

Wireless and network

Use packet data

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Network

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Using the 4G Network

Data Roaming

To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection,

the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both

the fastest and most stable connection/communication method.

This phone is capable of using either 4G/3G services for this

connection.

Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s

partner networks and access data services when you are out of

your service providers area of coverage.

1. Press

Wireless and network

2. Tap Data roaming

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Mobile networks

1. Press

Wireless and network

mode

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Network

Access Point Names

To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point

(hotspot).

2. Tap GSM/WCDMA (auto mode). A check mark displays next

to this option to indicate that it is active. This is the default

mode for this phone.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Wireless and network

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Access Point

Names. A list of the Access point names display. The active

access point displays a bright green, filled circle to the

right of the name.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

176

Using the 2G (EDGE) Network

Network Operators

If you are not using applications that require the 3G network

speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a

browser), using the 2G network saves battery life.

Using this feature you can view the current network connection.

You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set

the network selection to Automatic.

1. Press

Wireless and network

mode

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Network

Wireless and network

➔

Mobile networks.

2. Tap Network operators. The current network connection

2. Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option to

displays at the bottom of the list.

indicate that it is active.

Important!: You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an

available network.

Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.

3. Tap Search now to manually search for a network.

Using the 3G Network

4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network

If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed,

follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network.

connection.

1. Press

Wireless and network

mode

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Network

2. Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this option

to indicate that it is active.

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Default Setup Options

Configuring General Call Settings

Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically search

for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to

select a network each time you connect.

Configure the general call settings using this option.

1. From the Home screen, tap

settings All calls

2. Tap one of the following options:

➔

Settings

➔

Call

➔

1. Press

Wireless and network

operators

2. Tap Default setup

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

➔

Mobile networks

➔

Network

• Show my number: allows you to select how your ID is handled

when an outgoing call is initiated.

• Auto reject: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming calls or

messages.

3. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually.

• Answering call: selects how your phone answers incoming calls.

Enable Answering mode, then select one of the following methods

for answering the phone:

– or –

Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a

–

Answering mode activates or deactivates the answering mode

function.

network.

Call Settings

To access the Call settings menu:

–

Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone.

Automatic answering automatically answers after a period of time.

Selections are: Off, after 1 second, after 2 seconds, after 3 seconds,

after 4 seconds, or after 5 seconds.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Call settings

• Prefix dialling: when activated, this feature automatically prepends

a string of numbers (such as an area code) to any dialed number.

This feature is useful for international dialing, or dialing within an

area code where all the calls you make for a period of time use one

prefix. For more information, refer to “Prefix Dialing” on

page 53.

– or –

From the Home screen, tap

Call settings

➔

Settings

➔

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

178

• Reject call with message: allows you to send a message

immediately after rejecting a call.

• Call barring: allows specified numbers to be barred from this

phone.

• Call status tones: sets a tone to play for the following status tones:

Call connect tone, Minute minder, or Call end tone. Touch each type

of status tone you want to play.

• Call waiting: enables call waiting functionality. When deactivated,

all incoming calls are directed to your voicemail if you are already on

an active call.

• Outgoing call vibration: allows your phone to vibrate when the

called party answers.

• Auto redial: automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to

connect or the call is cut off.

• Alerts on call: activates an alert tone for new messages being

Fixed Dialing Numbers

received during an active call.

Fixed Dial Number (FDN), allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a

limited set of phone numbers.

Configuring Voice Calls

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap one of the following options:

• Call forwarding: configures call forwarding options:

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Enabling FDN

➔

Voice call

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap Enable FDN

3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Fixed Dialing Numbers.

–

Always forward: incoming calls are re-routed to a secondary number

that you specify.

Forward when busy: forwards all your calls to voicemail when your

phone is busy.

Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this

menu does not display.

Forward when unanswered: automatically forwards to your

voicemail number when the phone is not answered, and otherwise

allows you to enter a voicemail number.

The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect

PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer

service for assistance.

–

Forward when unreachable: automatically forwards to your

voicemail number when the phone is not in service, or is turned off.

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the PIN2 Code

4. Tap FDN list then press

and then tap Add contact or

edit the contacts that were stored.

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap Change PIN2

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Fixed Dialing Numbers.

Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this

menu does not display.

3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.

4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.

5. Confirm your PIN2 code.

The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect

PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer

service for assistance.

Voicemail

You can view your voicemail number from this menu.

Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this

menu does not display.

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap Voicemail service and select My carrier

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect

PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer

service for assistance.

➔

Voicemail

3. Tap Voicemail number to now view your number within the

Managing the FDN List

Voicemail number field.

When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone

numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.

HAC Mode

1. Press

Call settings

2. Tap Enable FDN

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid

Compatibility for this device.

➔

Fixed Dialing Numbers.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

HAC mode

(Settings) ➔

Call settings

➔

3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK

FDN is enabled.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

180

2. Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the

Drive Smart

feature. Off is the default setting.

The DriveSmart application can be used to reduce distractions

from your phone by silencing notifications, routing calls to

voicemail and customizing auto responses to both callers and

text message respondents notifying them that your driving.

TTY Mode

A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a

telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,

hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to

communicate by telephone.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

DriveSmart

For more information, refer to “DriveSmart” on page 130.

Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check

with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is

compatible with digital cell phones.

Sound Settings

From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well

as configure the display settings.

Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that

plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not

provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device

manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

The following options display:

1. Press

➔

and then tap

TTY mode

(Settings) ➔

Call settings

➔

2. Tap On to activate the feature, or Off to deactivate the

feature. Off is the default setting.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Silent mode

Adjusting the Volume Settings

Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from

making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the

speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of

incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a defined

tone or sound as an alert.

The Volume menu now provides access to various volume

settings within one on-screen popup menu.

1. Press

Volume

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound

➔

2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

settings for any of the following volume levels.

2. Tap Silent mode

• Incoming call volume

Media volume, System volume, or

– or –

Notification volume

From the Home screen, press and hold the Lock key until

3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels.

Phone options displays.

Setup the Voice Call Ringtone

3. Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode (the

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

current mode displays).

2. Tap Phone ringtone

Setup Phone Vibration

3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly

1. Press

2. Tap Vibrate and select a vibration mode. Choose from:

Always Never Only in silent mode, or Only when not in silent

mode

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound

plays when selected.

4. Tap OK to assign a ringer.

Setting a Notification Ringtone

1. Press

Notification ringtone

2. Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK

Changing Your Settings

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound

➔

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Audible Tone Settings

2. Tap Haptic feedback. A check mark displayed next to the

feature indicates Haptic feedback

is active.

The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used

when you use the dialing pad or making a screen selection. Each

time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone

sounds.

3. Tap Vibration intensity then touch and drag the slider to

adjust the vibration intensity, then touch OK

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

Display Settings

2. Tap Audible touch tones or Audible selection. A check mark

In this menu, you can change various settings for the display

such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock

feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power saving

mode, and tv out settings.

displayed next to these features indicates active status.

Screen Lock Sounds

The screen lock sounds option is used to activate/deactivate

sounds when locking and unlocking the screen.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Display. The following options display:

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

• Wallpapers: assigns either the Home screen or Lock screen

2. Tap Screen lock sounds. A check mark displayed next to

wallpaper images.

these features indicates active status.

• Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are:

Default font, Choco cooky, Cool jazz, and Rosemary. Tap Get fonts

online to download additional fonts.

Haptic Feedback and Vibration Intensity

Instead of sounding a tone, the Haptic feedback option vibrates

when you press soft keys on certain screens. You can also set the

intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting.

• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap Automatic

brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust and tap OK

• Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically

switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa.

When this setting is disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode

only.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Sound.

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Puzzle lock: when selected puzzle pieces display on the lock

screen for messages and missed calls. Slide the puzzle piece into

the matching slot to view the message or missed call information.

Connecting your Phone to the TV

TV out

This feature allows you to connect your phone to your television

(using an optional cable) and view any imaged stored on the

phone and view it directly on your television.

• Animation: determines whether some or all of the window

elements animate. Selections are: No animations, Some

animations, or All animations.

• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen

automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds,

1 minute, 2 minutes, and 10 minutes.

Note: The TV system (NTSC) option is used if you are connecting to an older,

analog NTSC system.

• Power saving mode: saves power because the phone analyzes the

To use the TV out feature:

displayed screen image and adjusts the LCD brightness.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

• TV out: connects your phone to your television (using an optional

cable) and displays any image stored on the phone directly on your

television.

Display

➔

TV out.

2. Tap one of the following options:

• TV out to play all of the phone's video output through the TV-out

• Horizontal calibration: uses the accelerometer to calibrate the

phone when held in a horizontal position.

feature.

Power Saving Mode

• TV system: to play the phone's video out through an analog TV

video system converter (NTSC/PAL).

This mode allows you to save power because the phone analyzes

the displayed screen image and adjusts the LCD brightness.

Note: NTSC is usually used in America.

1. Press

Display

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

2. Touch Power Saving mode to activate the feature. A check

mark displayed next to the feature indicates Power Saving

mode is active.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

184

Horizontal Calibration

Enabling the GPS Satellites

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Calibrate your phone by using the built-in accelerometer.

Location and security

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Display

➔

Horizontal calibration

2. Tap Use GPS satellites enable the GPS satellite.

2. Place the phone on a level surface and tap Calibrate. The

phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer. During the

calibration process a green circle appears on-screen and

the center circle adjusts to the center position.

Enabling the sensor aiding

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security. For more information, refer to

“Enabling a Location source” on page 134.

Location and Security

2. Tap Use sensor aiding enhances positioning and save

The Location and Security settings allow you to configure phone

location and security settings.

power while using the sensors.

Using Wireless Networks

Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your

location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use

wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security

2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information

using the wireless network.

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point.

Then, without removing your finger from the screen, drag

your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line

overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green

circle.

Screen Unlock Pattern Settings

To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a

screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every

time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen

automatically turns off).

Setting an Unlock Pattern

6. When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,

Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the

phone. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will

draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to

unlock the phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate

the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback

while drawing the pattern.

horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the

screen and tap Continue

7. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping

Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.

Changing the Screen Lock Pattern

Note: Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.

This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock

pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to

changing your password from time to time.

1. Press

Location and security

2. Tap Set screen lock

3. Read the instructions then tap Next

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

Location and security

2. Tap Set screen lock

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Pattern.

➔

Change screen lock.

4. Review the onscreen animation procedure for drawing a

3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.

pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern.

4. Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous

section.

Changing Your Settings

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using Visible a Pattern

Password Lock and Unlock

1. Press

Location and security

2. Tap Set screen lock

3. Tap Password

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

When enabled, this feature displays the onscreen lock grid that is

used to unlock the phone.

Using Tactile Feedback

When enabled, the User tactile feedback option, you will feel

vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern.

4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to

PIN Lock and Unlock

confirm the password.

1. Press

Location and security

2. Tap Set screen lock

3. Tap PIN

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to

confirm.

Setting up SIM Card Lock

Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make

unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your

SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.

4. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch

Continue to confirm the password.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

5. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.

Location and security

Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in

order to unlock the phone.

2. Tap Set up SIM card lock

3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then touch OK

Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN

code.

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To change an existing SIM Card PIN:

4. Tap Change SIM PIN

5. Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK

6. Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK

2. Tap Select device administrators to begin configuring this

setting.

3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.

Credential Storage

7. Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK

This option allows certain applications to access secure

certificates and other credentials. Certificates and credentials

can be installed to the SD card and password protected.

Password Settings

When you create a phone password you can also configure the

phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an

asterisk (*).

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security

2. Tap Use secure credentials to activate this feature. A check

mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure

credentials is active.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security

2. Tap Visible passwords to activate this feature.

3. Tap Install encrypted certificates to install encrypted

Device Administration

certificates from the memory (SD) card.

Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone

in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This

would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or

stolen. The phone could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through

administration) from a remote location.

4. Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage

password.

5. Tap Clear storage to clear the storage (SD card or phone

memory) of all contents and reset the credentials

password.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Location and security

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

188

Managing Applications

Applications

This phone can be used for Android development. You can write

applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run

the applications using the hardware, system, and network. This

feature allows you to configure the device for development.

This feature allows you to manage installed applications. You can

view and control currently running services, or use the device for

application development.

You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as

well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the

applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.

Warning!: Android Dev Phones are not intended for non-developer end-

users. Because the device can be configured with system

software not provided by or supported by Google or any other

company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

Unknown Sources

Clearing Application Cache and Data

Before you can download a web application you must enable the

Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can

use this option to install non-Market applications.

Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this

feature.

1. Press

Applications

2. Tap Unknown sources to active this feature.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.

3. Tap Clear cache Clear defaults Force stop, or Show all

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Uninstalling Third-party Applications

Moving Third-party Applications to your SD Card

Your phone’s built in memory is augmented by using a microSD

card to store additional data. When the phone’s built-in memory

capacity is reached, it can be possible to move some applications

over to the internal microSD card. Freeing up memory space on

the phone can help avoid any sluggish performance when the

phone has to work harder to manage memory resources.

Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this

feature.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

2. Tap the Third-party tab and select your desired application.

Important!: Only certain downloaded applications are capable of being

3. Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application

moved from phone to card.

info page).

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

4. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.

Applications

➔

Manage applications.

5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap

2. Tap the Third-party tab and select your desired application.

OK.

3. Tap Move to SD card (from within the Storage section of the

Application info page).

Once the application has been moved to the microSD card, this

button now reads “Move to phone”.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

190

Running Services

Android Development

Press and then tap

Applications Development

ᮣ

➔

(Settings) ➔

The Running services option allows you to view and control

currently running services such as Backup, doubletwist, Google

Talk, SNS (messaging), Swype, and more.

➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Important!: These features are used for development purposes only.

Applications

➔

Running services

USB Debugging

The screen displays all the processes that are running.

This feature is used for development purposes only.

Allowing Mock Locations

2. Tap a process to stop the process from running.

When you stop the process the service or application will

no longer run until you start the process or application

again.

This feature is used for development purposes only.

If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using

this device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different

GPS locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock”

the coordinates.

Important!: Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the

application.

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USB Settings

Accounts and Synchronization

This menu selects the method of communication for the USB

port.

Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety

of different sources or sites. These accounts can range from

Google, a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server, and other

social sites such as Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace. Corporate

and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar

events and Contacts.

Note: Before initiating a USB connection with the phone you must disable the

Bluetooth feature, and/or USB debugging feature.

1. Press

Applications

2. Select one of the following USB modes:

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

To enable the auto-sync feature:

➔

USB settings

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Accounts and sync

• Kies (Firmware update): connects your phone to a PC and

prepares it for a direct firmware update.

2. Tap Auto-sync. A green checkmark indicates the feature is

enabled. This feature enables the synchronization of data

between your phone and external sites or servers.

• Media player: connects your phone to a PC in order to synchronize

files with Windows Media Player.

• Mass storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of

the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your

computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive. For

more information, refer to “Memory Card” on page 48.

•

The three main components are Contacts Email, and Calendar

Events. Before these can be synchronized, they must be added to

the managed accounts list.

• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the

• Ask on connection: asks for a connection type when you connect

to a computer.

background.

Changing Your Settings

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Synchronizing a Google Account

To configure the Google management settings:

1. Press and then tap

Accounts and sync

2. Tap within the Google account field to reveal the

➔

(Settings) ➔

By default, there are no accounts managed by the device. These

must be manually added.

To manage an existing Google account

1. Press and then tap

Accounts and sync

2. Tap Add account

3. Tap Next Sign in

➔

(Settings) ➔

account’s synchronization settings screen.

3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync

➔

Google.

Contacts

Sync Gmail, or Sync Calendar). A green

checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.

➔

4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

Note: If you do not already have a Google account, tap Create and follow the

on-screen prompts to create your new account.

For more information, refer to “Synchronizing Contacts”

on page 86.

4. Touch the Username (@gmail.com) and Password fields

and enter your information.

5. Tap Sign in. Your phone then communicates with the

Google servers to confirm your information. Your existing

Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts

area of the screen.

•

Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then

automatically updated to your device.

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Synchronizing Your Corporate Account

Privacy Settings

By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by

the device. These must be manually added.

Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to

erase all personal data.

ᮣ

Press

Privacy

Mobile Backup and Restore

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is automatically added as

a managed account.

Use the following procedure to configure your phone to

synchronize with a corporate email account.

The phone can be configured to back up your current settings,

application data and settings.

1. From the Home screen, tap

(Applications)➔ Settings

1. Press

Privacy

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

➔

Accounts and sync

– or –

Press

2. Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

phone settings and applications.

Accounts and sync

3. Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of a

previously installed application (including preferences and

data).

2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to

synchronize.

3. Tap

within the adjacent account field to reveal the

account’s synchronization settings screen.

4. Toggle the check mark adjacent to either the Sync

Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to manually sync the

account.

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

194

Factory Data Reset

Search Settings

From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to

the factory default settings.

You can use your phone's search preferences to configure some

aspects of Google Web search (for example, whether it makes

suggestions below the Quick Search Box as you type), and what

phone features you want to include in searches.

1. Press

Privacy. (You will see a disclaimer.)

2. Touch Factory data reset Reset phone.

3. If necessary, enter your password and touch Erase

everything

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

1. Press

➔

and then tap

Search settings

(Search).

➔

2. Press

➔

3. Tap any of the following search parameters to then alter

the settings:

The phone resets to the factory default settings

automatically and when finished displays the Home

screen.

• Google search opens a screen where you can set your Google

search preferences.

–

Show web suggestions: includes search matches from Google’s

online search engine.

SD Card & Phone Storage

From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the

memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.

Use My Location: uses your My Location information for Google

search results and services.

Search history: determines whether you also wish to included

personalized search history results in the list of matches.

For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card,

see “Using the SD Card” on page 48.

Manage search history: helps to manage the personalized search

history associated with your current registered Google account.

To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:

• Searchable items: opens a screen where you can choose the

search categories included in device searches. such as: Web,

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

SD card and phone storage.The available memory

displays under the Total space and Available space

headings.

Apps

Contacts, doubletwist, Kindle, Memo, Messaging,

Music Player, Phone

or Voice Search.

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• Clear shortcuts: erases the history for recently selected search

Swype Settings

results.

For more information, refer to “SWYPE Settings” on page 69.

Language & Keyboard Settings

This setting allows you to configure the language in which to

display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.

1. Press

and text

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Locale

➔

Swype.

2. Tap one of the following Swype preferences to activate the

ᮣ

Press

Locale and text

Language Settings

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

setting:

• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.

Default language is US English.

To set the language that the menus display on the phone:

1. Press and then tap Settings) ➔ Locale

and text Select locale

• Word prediction: uses a built-in word database to predict words

while entering text in Swype.

➔

(

• Audio feedback: turns off sounds generated by the Swype

application.

➔

2. Select a language and region from the list.

• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter

text using the keypad.

Select Input Method

• Enable tip indicator: turns on an on-screen flashing indicator that

provides helpful user information.

There are two input methods available: Swype and Samsung

keypad.

1. Press

and text

2. Select an input method.

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ Locale

➔

Select input method

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

196

Swype Advanced settings

About

Advanced settings provide access to Swype operation

parameters.

Provides information about the current Swype application

version.

• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.

When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the

next word.

Samsung Keyboard Settings

For more information, refer to “The Samsung Keypad” on

page 71.

• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a

sentence.

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

• Show complete trace: determines whether or not to display the

Locale and text

➔

Samsung keypad.

complete Swype trace path on-screen.

2. Tap Portrait Keypad types and select a text input method:

• Word choice window: sets the amount of times the word choice

selection window displays on screen. Move the slider between

•

Qwerty Keypad

3x4 Keypad

Never or Always and tap OK

• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to

on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or

3. Tap Input languages and select a language.

4. Tap XT9 to use XT9 Predictive text method. For more

information, refer to “XT9 Advanced Settings” on

page 198. F or more information, refer to “Text Input

Methods” on page 68.

Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK

Swype Help settings

Help settings provide access to Swype help operation

parameters.

• Swype help: displays the on-screen Swype User Manual.

5. Tap the Keypad sweeping field if you want to sweep the

keypad and change from ABC to ?123 mode. For more

information, refer to “Text Input Methods” on page 68.

• Tutorial: provides an on-screen tutorial that shows you how to input

text faster in Swype input mode.

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Tap the Auto-capitalization field to automatically capitalize

4. Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects

typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible

words that reflect the characters of the keys you touched

as well as the characters of nearby keys.

the first letter of a sentence.

7. Tap Voice input to activate the Voice input feature. This is

an experimental feature that uses Google’s networked

speech recognition application.

5. Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word

prediction.

8. Tap Auto-full stop to automatically insert a full stop by

tapping the space bar twice.

6. Tap the Auto-append field to automatically add predictions.

9. Tap the Tutorial field to view a short tutorial on use of the

7. Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace

words that you are typing. This option assists with

correcting misspelled words.

Samsung keyboard.

XT9 Advanced Settings

8. Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the

device to automatically correct mistyped words according

to normal spelling for your region.

The following XT9 Advanced settings are available when the XT9

field is selected.

1. Tap the XT9 field to select XT9 (predictive text) mode, then

tap XT9 advanced settings

9. Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to

re-display the word suggestion list when you select the

wrong word from the list.

2. Tap the Word completion field to enable word completion.

Your phone predicts how to complete the word typed.

10. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary:

3. Tap the Word completion point field then touch 2 letters

Tap the XT9 my words field, then press

Add. Enter the new word in the Register to XT9 my words

field, then tap Done

and then tap

letters 4 letters, or the 5 letters radio button. Word

completion begins after 2 or more (depending on your

selection).

Changing Your Settings

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

198

11. Tap XT9 auto-substitution to add words to substitute (for

example youve becomes you’ve). A list of substitutions

displays.

Voice Input and Out Settings

Configuring Voice Input Recognition

This feature allows the phone to correctly recognize verbal input.

12. If you do not see the substitution you want, press

then tap Add, then input the Shortcut word and

Substitution word.

and

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Voice input and output

➔

Voice recognition settings

2. Configure the available options to alter the settings

13. Tap Done

associated with this feature:

• Language: selects an input language and associated dialect

Accessibility Settings

recognition (if available).

This service is able to collect all the text you type, including

personal data credit card numbers except passwords. It may also

log your user interface interactions. It comes from the

applications such as KickBack, SoundBack, and TalkBack.

• SafeSearch: sets the explicit image filter settings. These settings

apply to only Google voice search results. Choose from: Off

Moderate, or Strict

• Block offensive words: allows you to block recognition of known

offensive words or language. (A green check mark indicates the

feature is active).

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Accessibility

• Show hints: displays hints on a search box.

Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility applications

3. Press

to return to the previous screen.

from the Android Market.

2. Tap Accessibility to activate the feature, then select the

services for which you want data to log.

Note: The

(power key) ends all calls.

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuring Text-to-speech

• Language: assigns the language used for verbal readout. Choose

from American English or Spanish.

This feature allows the phone to provide a verbal readout of

on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller

information.

• Pico TTS: configures the pico TTS settings for various languages.

Date and Time

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(

Settings) ➔

This menu allows you to change the current time and date

displayed.

Voice input and output

➔

Text-to-speech settings

1. Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

2. Configure the available options to alter the settings

Date and time

associated with this feature:

2. Tap Automatic to allow the network set the date and time.

• Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-to-

speech feature sounds like on your device when activated.

Important!: Deactivate Automatic to manually set the rest of the options.

• Driving mode: incoming calls and new notifications are

automatically ready out loud.

3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the

• Always use my settings: accepts an override of application

settings with personal configurations for this text-to-speech settings

screen. If enabled, your device defaults to using the text-to-speech

feature.

Month Day, and Year then touch Set.

4. Tap Select time zone, then touch a time zone.

5. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and

• Default engine: sets the speech synthesis engine that will be used

for the spoken text. Choices include: Pico TTS

Minute. Touch PM or AM, then tap Set

• Install voice data: confirms the installation of necessary data

required for voice synthesis.

•

Optional: Touch Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the

phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.

• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by

6. Tap Select date format and touch the date format type.

the device. Choose from: Very slow

Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very

fast.

Changing Your Settings

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About Phone

• System tutorial: provides a quick, online tutorial that walks you

through basic phone features. Read the on-screen information and

follow the system prompts.

This menu contains legal information, system tutorial

information, and other phone information such as the model

number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version, and

software build number.

• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.

• Firmware version: displays the firmware version loaded on this

handset.

To access phone information:

• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this

handset.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔ About

phone. The following information displays:

• Kernal version: displays the kernal version loaded on this handset.

• Build number: displays the software, build number.

• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery

(percentage), the phone number for this device, the network

connection, signal strength, mobile network type, service state,

roaming status, mobile network state, IMEI number, IMEI SV, Wi-Fi

MAC address, Bluetooth address, and Up time.

Note: Firmware, baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used for

updates to the handset or support. For additional information please

contact your T-Mobile service representative.

• Battery use: displays the applications or services (in percentages)

that are using battery power.

Software Update

The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to

connect to the network and upload any new phone software

directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the

latest available software when you access this option.

• Legal information: This option displays information about Open

source licenses as well as Google legal information. This

information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal

information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of

Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent

information as a reference.

ᮣ

Press

➔

and then tap

(Settings) ➔

Software update

Read the information and terms, then press BACK to return to the

Settings menu.

The phone automatically updates the software (if

available).

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Section 13: Health and Safety Information

This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using

your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used

in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before

The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the

microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially

reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high

levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),

exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects

causes no known adverse health effects.

using your mobile device

Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published

information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)

exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the

following information:

The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be

confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic

energy.

Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in

X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization

is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal

locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage

biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause

cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific

evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.

Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over

the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies

looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy

emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported

biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have

failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have

failed to show an association between exposure to radio

frequency from a cell phone and health problems.

The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,

including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great

enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore,

RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of

non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation

(heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with

relatively low frequencies.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

202

While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can

increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two

areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly

vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood

flow in them to carry away excess heat.

Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain

cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain

cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use

of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every

day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in

brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and

errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data.

Additional information about Interphone can be found at

http://com.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/.

Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between

RF and certain health problems?

The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,

attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have

shown a connection have failed.

Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not

answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research

is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to

monitor developments in this field.

The scientific community at large therefore believes that the

weight of scientific evidence does not show an association

between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and

adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has

supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge.

Some of these studies are described below.

International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)

The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring

of a large group of people to determine if there are any health

issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy

from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow

Interphone Study

Interphone is a large international study designed to determine

whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A

report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology

(June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000

people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar

number of healthy controls.

approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to

30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be

found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RiskofBrainCancerfromExposuretoRadioFrequencyFields

in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)

Cell Phone Industry Actions

Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory

actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a

number of steps, including the following:

MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship

between exposure to radio frequency energy from

communication technologies including cell phones and brain

cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center

study involving 14 European and non-European countries.

Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at

http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/

view.php?ID=39.

•

Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for

the type of signal emitted by cell phones;

Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the

user; and

Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current

information on cell phone use and human health concerns.

Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program

of the National Cancer Institute

The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies

such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

(IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation

Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards

continue to adequately protect the public.

The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer

statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of

new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for

brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use

has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987

and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did

not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at

http://seer.cancer.gov/

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

204

Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other

Accessories

Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy

Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions

from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free

kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience

and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you

want to use your phone while driving.

If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy

(RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that

there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned

about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple

steps to minimize your RF exposure.

Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from

RF Radiation

Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions

from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories

which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce

risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF

absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing

more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies

have shown that these products generally do not work as

advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields”

may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may

be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an

increase in RF absorption.

•

Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your

head and the cell phone.

Hands-Free Kits

Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and

various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and

holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy

absorption from cell phones.

Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone

is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved

body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are

required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when

used against the head and against the body.

Children and Cell Phones

The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of

cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers.

The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to

children and teenagers as well.

•

Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the

head and the cell phone.

•

World Health Organization (WHO):

http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.

International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:

http://www.icnirp.de.

Some groups sponsored by other national governments have

advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at

all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom

made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report,

a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that

using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their

recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly

precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any

health hazard exists.

Health Protection Agency:

http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.

US Food and Drug Administration:

http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/

RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/

HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification

Information

Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is

designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for

Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.

Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various

sources can be obtained from the following organizations

(updated 10/1/2010):

•

FCC RF Safety Program:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.

These FCC exposure limits are derived from the

recommendations of two expert organizations: the National

Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and

the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

http://www.osha.gov/S L T C/radiofrequencyradiation/.

(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)

In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific

and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and

academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature

related to the biological effects of RF energy.

•

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):

http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

206

The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones

employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific

Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of

absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of

watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to

comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).

For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets

FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that

contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a

minimum of 1.5 cm from the body.

Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF

exposure guidelines.

The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of

safety to give additional protection to the public and to account

for any variations in measurements.

The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile

phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance

with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values

for this model phone as reported to the FCC are:

SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions

accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest

certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the

SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual

SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the

maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to

operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power

required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a

wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.

•

Head: 0.90 W/Kg.

Body-worn: 1.23 W/Kg.

SAR information on this and other model phones can be viewed

online at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea . To find information that

pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone

FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case

of the phone.

Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to

find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a

particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it

should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular

phone. Additional product specific SAR information can also be

Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it

must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed

the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model

phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear

and worn on the body) as required by the FCC.

obtained at www.fcc.gov/cgb/sar

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these

tips:

Smart Practices While Driving

On the Road - Off the Phone

•

Use a hands-free device;

The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of

his or her vehicle.

Secure your phone within easy reach;

Place calls when you are not moving;

Plan calls when your car will be stationary;

Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;

Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be

performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to

passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has

assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the

secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.

Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which

may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so

absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act

of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting

responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to

understand and address distractions.

Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving

and will suspend the call if necessary;

•

Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;

Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an

automobile:

Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or

near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law

may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the

automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or

ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an

automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result

in fines, penalties, or other damages.

Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and

their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them.

The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain

areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in

certain areas.

Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the

driver's clear view of the street and traffic.

Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call

go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember,

driving comes first, not the call!

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

208

Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web

browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.

•

Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive

heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the

phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with

an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer,

iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high

temperatures.

Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games

while operating a vehicle.

For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org

Battery Use and Safety

•

Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or the

battery may explode when overheated.

Important!: Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage

Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking battery

fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe disposal

options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service center.

Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery,

especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the

phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take

it to a service center for inspection.

Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries

and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries.

•

Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt

to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of

pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-

circuit, resulting in overheating.

•

Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.

Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even

when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally,

the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the

phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service

provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working

properly.

•

Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.

Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental

short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry,

clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals

of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry

a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may

damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling

Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its

customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine

Samsung accessories.

Important!: Important: Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge

your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are

specifically designed for your phone.

Warning!: Warning: Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may

Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only

important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must

be recycled or disposed of properly.

present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard

Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused

by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.

Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and

accessories may not be available in your area.

•

Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some

websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable

manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even

counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase

manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If

unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,

contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.

We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile

device by working with respected take-back companies in every

state in the country.

Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging

devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible

risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries,

damages to your phone, or other serious hazard

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

210

Drop It Off

Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.

To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:

You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and

batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung

Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be

found at: http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/

www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect

Or call, (877) 278-0799.

Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices

and batteries

usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp

Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at

these locations for no fee.

Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with

local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in

household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect

the environment - recycle!

Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or

batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where

mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information

regarding specific locations may be found at:

Warning!: Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.

http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/

index.htm or at http://www.call2recycle.org/

UL Certified Travel Charger

Mail It In

The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety

requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions

per UL guidelines:

The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung

customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to

http://www.samsung.com/us/aboutsamsung/citizenship/

usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect.html?INT=STA_rec

yle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to print out a

free pre-paid postage label and then send your old mobile

device or battery to the address listed, via U.S. Mail, for

recycling.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY

LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE

PROPERTY DAMAGE.

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE

INSTRUCTIONS.

WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN

MOBILE DEVICE

DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please

note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch

from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using

excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the

touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface

and void the warranty. For more information, please refer

to the “Standard Limited Warranty” on page 223.

FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH

AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF

THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER

OUTLET.

THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY

ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR

MOUNT POSITION.

GPS & AGPS

Display / Touch-Screen

Please note the following information when using your mobile

device:

Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning

System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses

satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to

changes implemented in accordance with the Department of

Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).

Changes may affect the performance of location-based

technology on your mobile device.

WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY

The display on your mobile device is made of glass or

acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or

if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is

broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

212

Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global

Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the

cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your

wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data

charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with

your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for

details.

AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area. Therefore:

•

Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your

ability; and

•

Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder

instructs you.

Navigation

Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain

inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do

change over time. In some areas, complete information may not

be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that

the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see

before following them. All users should pay attention to road

conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact

Your Location

Location-based information includes information that can be

used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device.

Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network

transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use

applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving

directions), such applications transmit location-based

information. The location-based information may be shared with

third-parties, including your wireless service provider,

applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties

providing services.

safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs

Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls

When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may

activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the

emergency responders your approximate location.

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may

first need to deactivate those features before you can make an

emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular

service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to

give all the necessary information as accurately as possible.

Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of

communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call

until given permission to do so.

Emergency Calls

This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates

using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as

user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection

in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should

never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential

communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before

traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate

method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember,

to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched

on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.

Care and Maintenance

Your mobile device is a product of superior design and

craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions

below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you

to enjoy this product for many years:

Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile

device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile

device features are in use. Check with local service providers.

Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:

Liquids of any kind

To make an emergency call:

1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.

Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids

contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the

mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the

use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage

the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not

use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an

electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device.

2. From the Home screen, tap

. Enter the emergency

number for your present location (for example, 911 or

other official emergency number), then tap

Emergency numbers vary by location.

Call

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

214

Extreme heat or cold

Responsible Listening

Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.

Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss

Microwaves

Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud

sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is

played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to

loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of

preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that

using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and

cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead

to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use

of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or

other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also

been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the

ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual

susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing

problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a

portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the

sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As

a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for

everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and

equipment.

Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.

Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.

Dust and dirt

Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.

Cleaning solutions

Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong

detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth

slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.

Shock or vibration

Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough

handling can break internal circuit boards.

Paint

Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s

moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper

operation.

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

You should follow some common sense recommendations when

using any portable audio device:

any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio

device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.

•

Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an

audio source.

You can obtain additional information on this subject from the

following sources:

Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at

which you can hear adequately.

American Academy of Audiology

11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300

Reston, VA 20190

Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not

realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.

When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the

people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear

what you are listening to.

Voice: (800) 222-2336

Email: [email protected]

•

Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you

choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use

noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental

noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling

headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than

when using earbuds.

Internet: http://www.audiology.org/Pages/default.aspx

National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders

National Institutes of Health

31 Center Drive, MSC 2320

Bethesda, MD 20892-2320

•

Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time

is required before you hearing could be affected.

Email: [email protected]

Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such

as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary

hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.

Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/

•

Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you

experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

216

Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)

395 E Street, S.W.

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio

Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment

may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless

mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.

Suite 9200

Patriots Plaza Building

Implantable Medical Devices

Washington, DC 20201

Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4647)

1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)

Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328

Email: [email protected]

A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained

between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable

medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter

defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.

Persons who have such devices:

Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html

1-888-232-6348 TTY

•

Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from

their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;

•

Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;

Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to

minimize the potential for interference;

Operating Environment

Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area,

and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is

forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger.

When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another

device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do

not connect incompatible products.

•

Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason

to suspect that interference is taking place;

Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your

implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using

your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device,

consult your health care provider.

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Potentially Explosive Environments

For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-

faqs.html#

Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially

explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks

in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily

injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile

device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are

reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio

equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),

chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress.

Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not

always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,

chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied

petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air

contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal

powders, and any other area where you would normally be

advised to turn off your vehicle engine.

Other Medical Devices

If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the

manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately

shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to

assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile

device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in

these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care

facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to

external RF energy.

Vehicles

RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately

shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the

manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before

using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also

consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added

to your vehicle.

Posted Facilities

Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices

require you to do so.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

218

use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile

device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for

your personal needs.

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)

Regulations for Wireless Devices

On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309 modified the

exception of wireless mobile devices under the Hearing Aid

Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require digital wireless

mobile devices be compatible with hearing aids.

M-Ratings: Mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC

requirements and are likely to generate less interference to

hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is

the better/higher of the two ratings.

T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements

and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices

than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher

of the two ratings.

The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to

telecommunications services for persons with hearing

disabilities. While some wireless mobile devices are used near

some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants),

users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some

hearing devices are more immune than others to this

interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of

interference they generate.

Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device

manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find

this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is

relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and

wireless mobile device rating values are then added together.

The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system

for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find

mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing

devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices

that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on

the box.

A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6

is considered for best use. If a hearing aid meets the M2 level

rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating,

the sum of the two values equal M5. This is synonymous for T

ratings. This should provide the hearing aid user with “normal

usage” while using their hearing aid with the particular wireless

mobile device.

The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on

the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device

happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

“Normal usage” in this context is defined as a signal quality that

is acceptable for normal operation. The M mark is intended to be

synonymous with the U mark. The T mark is intended to be

synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T marks are

recommended by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industries

Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section

20.19 of the FCC Rules.

The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.

Restricting Children's Access to Your

Mobile Device

Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with

it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the

mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device

bill.

HAC/Wi-Fi Language

This mobile device has been tested and rated for use with

hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.

However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used

in this mobile device that have not been tested yet for use with

hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this

mobile device thoroughly and in different locations, using your

hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any

interfering noise. Consult your service provider about its return

and exchange policies and for information on hearing aid

compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange

policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.

Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of

the reach of small children.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

220

FCC Notice and Cautions

FCC Notice

Other Important Safety Information

Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the

mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be

dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.

•

The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in

close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you

to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be

eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as

propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection

Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the

National Fire Protection Association.

•

Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your

vehicle are securely mounted.

Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your

vehicle is mounted and operating properly.

Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials

in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or

accessories.

Cautions

Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly

approved in this document could void your warranty for this

equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.

Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of

any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the

mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a

defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite

sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.

Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.

•

For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag

inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or

portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in

the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly

installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.

•

Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of

wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to

the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before

using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.

Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or

denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly,

take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there

will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.

Dispose of phones in accordance with local regulations. In some areas,

the disposal of phones in household or business trash may be

prohibited. For safe disposal options for phones, contact your nearest

Samsung authorized service center.

Health and Safety Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

222

Section 14: Warranty Information

Standard Limited Warranty

items, including framing, and any non-operative parts unless caused by

SAMSUNG; (b) defects or damage resulting from excessive force when

pressing on a touch screen; (c) equipment that has the serial number or

the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or

made illegible; (d) any plastic surfaces or other externally exposed parts

that are scratched or damaged due to normal use; (e) malfunctions

resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with

accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or

approved by SAMSUNG; (f) defects or damage from improper testing,

operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not

furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage from

external causes such as collision with an object, or from fire, flooding,

sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake, or from exposure to

weather conditions, or battery leakage, theft, blown fuse, or improper

use of any electrical source; (h) defects or damage caused by cellular

signal reception or transmission, or viruses or other software problems

introduced into the Product; (i) any other acts which are not the fault of

SAMSUNG; or (j) Product used or purchased outside the United States.

This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls

below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited

Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged

by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging

the battery, (ii) any of the seals on the battery are broken or show

What is Covered and For How Long?

SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC ("SAMSUNG")

warrants to the original purchaser ("Purchaser") that SAMSUNG's

phones and accessories ("Products") are free from defects in

material and workmanship under normal use and service for the

period commencing upon the date of purchase and continuing for

the following specified period of time after that date:

Phone

1 Year

Batteries

1 Year

Leather Case

Holster

90 Days

1 Year

Other Phone Accessories

What is Not Covered? This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper

use of Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a)

defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use,

abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to moisture or

dampness, neglect, unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical

stress, or defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

evidence of tampering, or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment

other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified.

must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or

return of such Product.

What are SAMSUNG's Obligations? During the applicable warranty

period, SAMSUNG will repair or replace, at SAMSUNG's sole

option, without charge to Purchaser, any defective component

part of Product. To obtain service under this Limited Warranty,

Purchaser must return Product to an authorized phone service

facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by

Purchaser's sales receipt or comparable substitute proof of sale

showing the original date of purchase, the serial number of

Product and the sellers' name and address. To obtain assistance

on where to deliver the Product, call Samsung Customer Care at

1-888-987-4357. Upon receipt, SAMSUNG will promptly repair

or replace the defective Product. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's

sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or

What Are The Limits On Samsung's Warranty/liability? EXCEPT AS

SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN,

PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS," AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO

WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, OF ANY KIND

WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT

LIMITED TO:

•

THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE;

•

WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT;

DESIGN, CONDITION, QUALITY, OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT;

THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS

CONTAINED THEREIN; OR

components when repairing any Product or replace Product with

a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases,

pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90)

days. All other repaired/replaced Product will be warranted for a

period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on

the original Product or for 90 days, whichever is longer. All

replaced parts, components, boards and equipment shall

become the property of SAMSUNG. If SAMSUNG determines that

any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, Purchaser

•

COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY

LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO.

NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE

CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY OF ANY KIND

WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. ALL IMPLIED

WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS THAT MAY ARISE BY OPERATION OF

LAW, INCLUDING IF APPLICABLE THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE

HEREBY LIMITED TO THE SAME DURATION OF TIME AS THE EXPRESS

Warranty Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

224

WRITTEN WARRANTY STATED HEREIN. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW

LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE

ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG

SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING

FROM THE PURCHASE, USE, OR MISUSE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE THE

PRODUCT OR ARISING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM THE USE OR

LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR FROM THE BREACH OF THE

EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED

PROFITS OR BENEFITS, OR FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS NEGLIGENCE) OR FAULT

COMMITTED BY SAMSUNG, ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, OR FOR ANY

BREACH OF CONTRACT OR FOR ANY CLAIM BROUGHT AGAINST

PURCHASER BY ANY OTHER PARTY. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY

TO YOU.

WHICH PURCHASER ACKNOWLEDGES IS AND WILL ALWAYS BE

CONSTRUED TO BE LIMITED BY ITS TERMS OR AS LIMITED AS THE LAW

PERMITS.

THE PARTIES UNDERSTAND THAT THE PURCHASER MAY USE THIRD-

PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE

PRODUCT. SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS

AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR

OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS,

PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR

EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT

IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR

OTHERWISE, INCLUDING THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH

SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT. THE QUALITY,

CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY

SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT LIE SOLELY WITH THE

PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH

THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, AS THE CASE MAY BE.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY

ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. THIS

LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE

ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT AND STATES PURCHASER'S

EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. IF ANY PORTION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS

HELD ILLEGAL OR UNENFORCEABLE BY REASON OF ANY LAW, SUCH

PARTIAL ILLEGALITY OR UNENFORCEABILITY SHALL NOT AFFECT THE

ENFORCEABILITY FOR THE REMAINDER OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY

This Limited Warranty allocates risk of Product failure between

Purchaser and SAMSUNG, and SAMSUNG's Product pricing reflects this

allocation of risk and the limitations of liability contained in this Limited

Warranty. The agents, employees, distributors, and dealers of SAMSUNG

are not authorized to make modifications to this Limited Warranty, or

make additional warranties binding on SAMSUNG. Accordingly,

additional statements such as dealer advertising or presentation,

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

whether oral or written, do not constitute warranties by SAMSUNG and

should not be relied upon.

BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT

ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE

"DECLINE" BUTTON, DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.

Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC

1301 E. Lookout Drive

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights

provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this

EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of

the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage

media of one computer and use the Software on a single

computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make

the Software available over a network where it could be used by

multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of

the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes

only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or

other proprietary notices contained on the original.

Richardson, Texas 75082

Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG

Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)

No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written

approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without

notice. [021710]

End User License Agreement for Software

2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves

all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software

is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and

treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and

other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is

licensed, not sold.

IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement

("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual

or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software

owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated

companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that

accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and

may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or

electronic documentation ("Software"). BY CLICKING THE "I

ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE

THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD,

ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO

3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse

engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to

discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except

and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by

Warranty Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

226

applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or

disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works

based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense

or provide commercial hosting services with the Software.

all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and

printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not

retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an

indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the

end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA

terms.

4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its

affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as

part of the product support services related to the Software

provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may

use this information solely to improve its products or to provide

customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose

this information in a form that personally identifies you.

7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is

subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to

comply with all applicable international and national laws that

apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration

Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination

restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.

5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and

add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may

provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain

your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms

along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an

upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by

Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may

no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your

upgrade eligibility.

8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your

rights under this License will terminate automatically without

notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms

and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you

shall cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or

partial, of the Software.

9. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. You expressly acknowledge

and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk and that

the entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy

and effort is with you. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND

WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND

6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the

rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it

is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the

Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAMSUNG AND ITS LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS

"SAMSUNG" FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 9, 10 and 11)

HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH

RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR

STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF

SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,

OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT,

AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG

DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR

ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS

CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR

REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL

BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE

SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN

INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SAMSUNG OR A SAMSUNG

AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY.

SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE

ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR

CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE

EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON

APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THESE

EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

10. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN

OTHER DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN

NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY,

OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF

DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR FOR ANY PECUNIARY

DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR

USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE PROVISION OF

OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR OTHER SERVICES,

INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND RELATED CONTENT THROUGH

THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF

THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION

WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA, HOWEVER CAUSED,

REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT

OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF

THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO

NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL

INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO

THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that

you might incur for any reason whatsoever (including, without

limitation, all damages referenced herein and all direct or general

damages in contract or anything else), the entire liability of

Samsung under any provision of this EULA and your exclusive

remedy hereunder shall be limited to the greater of the actual

Warranty Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

228

damages you incur in reasonable reliance on the Software up to

the amount actually paid by you for the Software or US$5.00. The

foregoing limitations, exclusions and disclaimers (including

Sections 9, 10 and 11) shall apply to the maximum extent

permitted by applicable law, even if any remedy fails its essential

purpose.

the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If

any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,

unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full

force and effect.

Precautions for Transfer and Disposal

If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the

standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a

superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve

and reuse the data by means of special software.

12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed

only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"

consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software

documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other

end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this

sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s

Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear

which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to

default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care

Center for details.

13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of

TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA

shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the

International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly

excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably

settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in

accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial

Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and

binding upon the parties.

Important!: Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to

Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service

at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges

may apply.

14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire

agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software

and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written

communications, proposals and representations with respect to

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Care Center:

1000 Klein Rd.

Plano, TX 75074

Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)

Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:

1301 East Lookout Drive

Richardson, Texas 75082

Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)

Important!: If you are using a handset other than a standard numeric keypad,

dial the numbers listed in brackets.

Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)

2011 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights

reserved.

No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written

approval. Specifications and availability subject to change

without notice.

Warranty Information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

230

Index

Alarm Tone

Set as 121

memo 138

Messaging 40

Numerics

2G Network

Using 177

AllShare

messaging 139

Configuring Settings 126

Receiving Media 126

Transmitting Media 126

Amazon MP3 127

Answering a call 52

Answering Call 178

Application cache and data

Clearing 138

Application Menus

Navigating through 34

Applications 35

Android Market 40, 136

Browser 43, 150

Calculator 37, 127

Calendar 37

TeleNav GPS 42, 146

Using the Camcorder 114

Using the Camera 106

Video Player 42, 149

Voice Recorder 42, 149

Voice Search 43, 150

YouTube 43, 151

Applications and Development 124

Audio Postcard 127

Sending 98

3G Network 177

Using 177

4G 165

4G Network 176

Using 176

Accessing

Recently-used applications 35

Voice mail 17

Accounts and syncronization 124

Add 2 sec Pause 54

Add to Home

Shortcuts 124

Add to Slideshow 113

Adjusting

Auto Redial 179

Auto Reject 178

Auto-sync

Enabling 192

Camera 37, 129

Back up

Call volume 60

Email 38, 130

My Data 194

Backup and Restore 194

Adobe PDF 147

Airsync 117, 125

Alarm

Google Mail 38, 131

Google Maps 39, 134

Memo 40

Setting 168

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Battery

Charging 11

Extending Life 13

Installing 10

Scan for Devices 159

Call Barring 179

Call Forwarding 179

Call Functions 51

Answering 52

Sending Contact Information 160

Sending Contacts Via 160

Set Visibility 159

Low Battery Indicator 12

Removal 10

Saving Power 13

Wall Charger 11

Battery Cover

Removal 7

Replace 8

Battery Life

Extending 13

Settings 158

Status indicators 158

Switching to Headset during call 61

Turning on and off 158

Browser

Adding bookmarks 155

Deleting bookmarks 155

Emptying cookies 155

Entering a URL 153

Navigation 152

Ending 51

Ending a Call 51

Making a Multi-Party Call 61

Pause Dialing 54

Redialing the last number 55

Wait dialing 55

Call Logs 63

Accessing 64

Accessing from Notifications 64

Altering Numbers 66

Erasing 66

Battery Use & Safety 209

Bing

Options 153

Set Search Engine 157

Block List 66

Search Engine 157

Settings 156

Call Settings 178

General 178

Bluetooth

About 157

Bubble

Options 95

Voice Calls 179

Call Volume

Change Name 158

Deleting a Paired Device 160

Disable 158

Disconnecting a Paired Device 160

Enable 130, 158

Paring Devices 159

Adjusting 60

Call Waiting 63, 179

Calendar 167

Calling

Creating an event 167

Manually Sync Events 128

Settings 167

Calibration 184, 185

Using Wi-Fi 57

232

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Calls

Making a 51

Multi-party 61

Muting 61

Contact Entry

Options 81

Contact Image

Set as 113

Contacts List 51

Context Menus 79, 81

Navigation 35

Using 35

Camcorder

Contact List

see HD Camcorder 109

Camera 106

Camera Options 107

Options 107

Taking Pictures 106

Car Home 129

Care and Maintenance 214

Charging battery 11

Children and Cell Phones 205

Clearing

Application cache and data 138

Connections

Accessing the Internet 152

Contact

Copying to microSD Card 85

Copying to SIM Card 85

Creating a New 76

Joining 82

Options 80

Contact Menus

Options 81

Emptying 155

Copying Contact 85

Corporate Email

Account Syncronization 194

Add Account 194

Creating a Playlist 121

Creating and sending

Messages 92

Contacts

Adding a Number to Existing 79

Adding Your Facebook Friends 87

Additional Options 89

Default Storage Location 89

Deleting 80

Display Options 86

Displaying Contacts by Name 86

Filtering 86

First Name First 86

Groups 90

Last Name First 86

Sending 84

Customizing

Home screens 43

Data Roaming 176

Deleting

Multiple messages 96

Single message 96

Deleting a contact 80

Desk Home 129

Sending All 84

Setting Default Location 80

Settings 89

New From Keypad 77

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display

Icons 23

Emergency Calls 214

Ending

Folder

Creating and Managing 47

Settings 23

A call 51

Deleting 47

Status Bar 23

Entering Text 68

Renaming 47

Display / Touch-Screen 212

Displaying your phone number 51

Do cell phones pose a health hazard?

202

Using SWYPE 69

Erasing files from

Memory card 50

Exchange Email 101

Account Setup 101

Composing 102

Configuring Settings 102

Deleting Message 102

Opening 102

Font

Style 183

Gallery

doubletwist 117, 130

Folder Options 111

Image Options 112

Opening 116

Get Friends 87

Getting Started 6

Battery 10

Battery Cover 7

Locking/Unlocking the Phone 14

microSD card 9

Installation 117

Downloading

New application 136

DriveSmart

Handsfree 130

Refreshing Messages 102

Exposure to RF Signals 202

EDGE Network 177

Email 98

Facebook 111

Composing 99

Qik 148

SIM Card 8

Configuring Settings 100

Creating an Account 99

Internet Email 99

Opening 99

Opening Internet Email 99

Refreshing Messages 99

Sending 89

Factory Data Reset 195

Factory data reset 50

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)

Regulations for Wireless Devices 219

FCC Notice and Cautions 221

Fixed Dialing Numbers 179

Switching Phone On/Off 14

Voice Mail 16

Gmail 104, 131

Composing a message 104

Opening 104

Refreshing 104

234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Signing In 104

Viewing 105

Settings 90

GSM 176

Horizontal Calibration 184, 185

HSPA+ 165

Gogo 131

Google

Account Management Settings 193

Account Syncronization 193

Add Account 193

Adding a Sync Account 193

Create New Account 15

Retrieving Password 16

Set Search Engine 157

Signing into Your Account 16

Handsfree 130

Icons

Description 23

Indicator 23

Status 23

Images

HD Camcorder 114, 132

Accessing the Video Folder 114

Camcorder Options 114

Options 109

Settings 110

Assigning as a Contact icon 113

Assigning as wallpaper 113

Importing and Exporting

To SIM card 89

In call

Shooting Video 114

Health and Safety Information 202

History tab 91

Google mail

Hold